Test Bank for Complete A+ Guide to IT Hardware and Software CompTIA A+ Exams 220-1201 & 220-1202, 10

Test Bank for Complete A+ Guide to IT Hardware and Software CompTIA A+ Exams 220-1201 & 220-1202, 10th edition Cheryl A. Schmidt Christopher Lee

202-1202 TEST BANK 1 Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-001 Question: Which actions best demonstrate active listening when helping a frustrated user? a. Asking clarifying questions after the user finishes speaking. b. Avoiding eye contact to focus on documentation. c. Interrupting to offer a quick solution. d. Multitasking by checking phone notifications during the conversation.

Correct Answer: a. Asking clarifying questions after the user finishes speaking.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Active listening includes asking clarifying questions to better understand a customer’s issue and shows the user that they are being heard.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-002 Question: A technician is preparing to install an adapter card. Which of the following safety precautions should be performed first? a. Power on the PC to test the display. b. Connect all internal power cables. c. Disconnect the computer from its power source. d. Remove the device driver.

Correct Answer: c. Disconnect the computer from its power source Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Safety Notes Explanation: Disconnecting the computer from the power source is a fundamental safety step before any hardware installation or maintenance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-003 Question: What is one way a technician can display a positive attitude when interacting with a user? a. Assume all users have the same level of technical knowledge. b. Treat every issue, no matter how small, as important. c. Offer a resolution to the problem as quickly as possible. d. Engage in conversation and smile often to put the user at ease.

Correct Answer: b. Treat every issue, no matter how small, as important.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Demonstrating a positive attitude means treating every user concern seriously and respectfully, regardless of the issue’s perceived importance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-004 Question: When lifting a heavy laser printer in a repair area, which of the following is the best safety practice? a. Twist your torso to save time. b. Keep your legs straight and lift with your back. c. Ask for help or use lifting equipment if needed. d. Hold the object far away from your body.

Correct Answer: c. Ask for help or use lifting equipment if needed.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Safety Notes Explanation: Using proper lifting techniques or assistance helps prevent injury—especially when handling heavy IT equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-005 Question: What is a recommended method for maintaining professionalism during a support interaction? a. Nodding and making eye contact while taking notes b. Avoiding questions to speed up the resolution c. Letting the customer vent without acknowledging their frustration d. Speaking over the user to demonstrate knowledge Correct Answer: a. Nodding and making eye contact while taking notes Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Professionalism includes active listening techniques such as eye contact, taking notes, and showing engagement with the user’s concerns.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-006 Question: Which of the following USB versions supports the highest power delivery, up to 240 watts? a. USB 3.0 b. USB 3.2 Gen 2 c. USB 4 with PD d. USB 2.0 Correct Answer: c. USB 4 with PD Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Power Delivery (USB-PD) Explanation: USB 4 with Power Delivery (PD) supports power levels up to 240 watts, significantly more than earlier versions.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-007 Question: What is the primary advantage of using plenum cable in building air-circulation spaces? a. Enhanced fire resistance b. Higher data transmission speed c. Lower cost than PVC d. Easier to install than STP Correct Answer: a. Enhanced fire resistance Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: Plenum cable is treated with fire-retardant materials and produces less smoke and toxic fumes, making it safer for use in air ducts.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-008 Question: Which type of video connector supports both analog and digital signals? a. HDMI b. DVI-D c. DisplayPort d. DVI-I Correct Answer: d. DVI-I

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Digital Visual Interface (DVI) Explanation: DVI-I connectors support both analog and digital signals, making them more versatile than DVI-D. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-009 Question: A technician needs to connect a legacy serial device to a modern PC with only USB ports. What should they use? a. USB-C to HDMI adapter b. DB25 to RJ45 adapter c. USB-to-serial converter d. USB hub with mini-USB Correct Answer: c. USB-to-serial converter Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Modem and Serial Ports Explanation: A USB-to-serial converter allows modern computers to communicate with older devices using DB9/RS-232 serial connections.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-03-010 Question: Which of the following best defines the concept of active listening for a technician? a. Focusing on what the customer is saying and responding appropriately b. Listening quietly without responding or interacting c. Asking the customer repeated questions until they give a helpful answer d. Writing down technical terms to help explain the issue Correct Answer: a. Focusing on what the customer is saying and responding appropriately Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Active listening involves attentively focusing on the customer's words, confirming understanding, and responding in a supportive, non-confrontational manner.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-03-011 Question: Which behavior is discouraged when practicing active listening with a customer? a. Taking notes b. Summarizing the customer’s concern

c. Using technical jargon d. Nodding occasionally Correct Answer: c. Using technical jargon Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Avoiding technical jargon helps reduce customer anxiety and promotes clearer communication.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-03-012 Question: What is the main benefit of active listening for the technician? a. It reduces the time required to complete documentation. b. It improves understanding of the customer’s problem. c. It increases sales of replacement parts. d. It minimizes the need for customer follow-up.

Correct Answer: b. It improves understanding of the customer’s problem.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Active listening helps the technician gather accurate information, leading to faster and more effective problem resolution.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-013 Question: Which BIOS/UEFI feature ensures that only trusted software is allowed to boot by verifying the digital signature of boot loaders and drivers? a. TPM b. Secure Boot c. BIOS Password d. Drive Encryption Correct Answer: b. Secure Boot Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Given a scenario, configure and apply basic Microsoft Windows OS security settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Secure Boot Explanation: Secure Boot is a BIOS/UEFI feature that validates digital signatures to prevent unauthorized OS or malware from booting.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-014 Question: What should a technician do before flashing the BIOS/UEFI firmware to prevent data loss? a. Back up CMOS settings and current BIOS. b. Replace the CMOS battery. c. Disable TPM. d. Enable Secure Boot.

Correct Answer: a. Back up CMOS settings and current BIOS. Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.3 Given a scenario, implement workstation backup and recovery methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Flash BIOS Explanation: Backing up the CMOS settings and current BIOS ensures you can recover configuration data if the upgrade fails.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-015 Question: What is the risk of clearing the TPM module during system configuration? a. Increased boot times b. Invalidation of encryption keys c. Loss of device drivers d. Overclocking resets Correct Answer: b. Invalidation of encryption keys Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Compare and contrast common data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: TPM Considerations Explanation: Clearing TPM deletes security keys, potentially causing data loss on encrypted drives.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-016 Question: Which feature in Device Manager allows technicians to view and analyze IRQ conflicts? a. Devices by Connection b. Resources by Type c. Driver Details d. Power Management Tab Correct Answer: b. Resources by Type Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Using Device Manager to See Resources Explanation: The "Resources by Type" view shows IRQs and helps identify potential conflicts between devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-017 Question: Which visual indicator in Device Manager suggests a device may have a resource conflict or driver issue? a. Red X b. Down arrow c. Yellow exclamation mark d. Blue information icon Correct Answer: c. Yellow exclamation mark Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Configurations Explanation: A yellow exclamation mark indicates a resource conflict or driver problem for that device.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-018 Question: Which safety measure should a technician follow when working inside a computer to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD)? a. Use an antistatic wrist strap grounded to the case. b. Use a magnetic screwdriver. c. Wear latex gloves. d. Work with the computer powered on.

Correct Answer: a. Use an antistatic wrist strap grounded to the case.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Explanation: An antistatic wrist strap keeps the technician and the equipment at the same voltage potential, preventing ESD damage.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-019 Question: What should a technician always do before opening a computer case for preventive maintenance? a. Use compressed air to clean the vents. b. Disconnect and label internal cables. c. Unplug the computer and wear safety goggles. d. Run a disk defragmentation utility.

Correct Answer: c. Unplug the computer and wear safety goggles.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance

Explanation: Power must be disconnected, and safety equipment should be used to avoid injury or component damage during maintenance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-020 Question: Which of the following is an environmentally responsible way to dispose of old electronics? a. Use a certified e-waste recycling program. b. Store indefinitely in a warehouse. c. Recycle using municipal trash collection. d. Place in general office recycling bins.

Correct Answer: a. Use a certified e-waste recycling program.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.5 Summarize environmental impacts and local environment controls Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Certified e-waste recycling programs follow appropriate disposal protocols for electronics containing toxic materials.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-021 Question: What is a recommended way to clean dust from inside a computer during preventive maintenance? a. Use a household vacuum with metal attachments. b. Use compressed air after vacuuming with a nonmetallic tool. c. Spray isopropyl alcohol directly on the components. d. Submerge parts in warm soapy water.

Correct Answer: b. Use compressed air after vacuuming with a nonmetallic tool.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.5 Summarize environmental impacts and local environment controls Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Vacuuming first with a nonmetallic attachment, followed by compressed air, helps remove dust safely and efficiently.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-022 Question: What is the best way to handle front panel cables when disassembling or reassembling a computer? a. Pull them gently if they resist. b. Memorize their labels and pin directions. c. Document locations and align connectors carefully. d. Leave them attached to the motherboard.

Correct Answer: c. Document locations and align connectors carefully.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Step 3. Remove Internal Cables and Connectors Explanation: Front panel cables must be correctly oriented and reattached to the right pins to avoid errors during reassembly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-023 Question: What is the purpose of virtual memory in Windows? a. It uses hard drive space as if it were RAM. b. It stores firmware instructions for system startup. c. It encrypts memory modules during boot. d. It improves CPU clock speed for memory-intensive tasks.

Correct Answer: a. It uses hard drive space as if it were RAM. Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Virtual RAM Explanation: Virtual memory uses hard drive space as RAM when physical memory is full, enabling multitasking and large applications to run efficiently.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-024 Question: Which Windows tool allows you to monitor memory usage with real-time graphs? a. System Restore b. Task Manager c. BIOS Setup d. Control Panel Correct Answer: b. Task Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Monitoring Memory Usage in Windows Explanation: Task Manager's Performance tab displays real-time CPU and memory usage, helping users identify memory-related issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-025 Question: A technician is troubleshooting a customer's PC that freezes randomly. Which Windows diagnostic tool should they use to check for memory issues? a. Check Disk b. Event Viewer c. System File Checker d. Windows Memory Diagnostic Correct Answer: d. Windows Memory Diagnostic

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: The Windows Memory Diagnostic tool checks RAM for errors that could cause freezing, crashes, or sluggish performance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-026 Question: What happens if a paging file is placed on the same partition as the operating system? a. It increases application load speeds. b. It prevents hibernation. c. It can cause slower performance. d. It disables error logging.

Correct Answer: c. It can cause slower performance.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: For optimal performance, the paging file should be placed on a separate, fast drive, not on the OS partition.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-027 Question: A user installs new RAM and receives a POST error message. What is the most likely cause? a. Malware infection b. Incorrect RAM seating or type c. Expired BIOS firmware d. Incompatible graphics driver Correct Answer: b. Incorrect RAM seating or type Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: POST errors after a RAM upgrade often indicate improper seating or incompatible memory modules.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-028 Question: Which of the following best describes the purpose of the NTFS file system? a. To provide file compression and security features b. To enable fast formatting only c. To limit file sizes to 4 GB d. To allow only one partition per disk Correct Answer: a. To provide file compression and security features

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning Explanation: NTFS supports file compression and encryption, and is designed for high-capacity disks.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-029 Question: Which RAID level provides fault tolerance by mirroring data across two drives? a. RAID 0 b. RAID 1 c. RAID 5 d. RAID 6 Correct Answer: b. RAID 1 Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Fault Tolerance Explanation: RAID 1 duplicates data across two drives, providing redundancy in case of a drive failure.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-030 Question: Which command is used in Windows to check for file system errors and fix them? a. sfc /scannow b. convert c. diskpart d. chkdsk /f Correct Answer: d. chkdsk /f Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Storage Devices Overview Explanation: The 'chkdsk /f' command scans for and fixes file system errors.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-031 Question: Which Windows tool allows for managing partitions and formatting disks? a. Task Manager b. Disk Management c. Event Viewer d. System Configuration Correct Answer: b. Disk Management

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Windows Disk Management Explanation: Disk Management is used to create, delete, and format partitions and assign drive letters.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-032 Question: Which file system is most suitable for removable flash drives requiring large file support? a. FAT16 b. FAT32 c. NTFS d. exFAT Correct Answer: d. exFAT Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning Explanation: exFAT is optimized for flash drives and supports very large file sizes.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-033 Question: Which Windows setting allows a user to calibrate a touch screen after replacing it? a. System > Sound b. Device Manager > HID c. Calibrate Display Color d. Control Panel > Power Options Correct Answer: c. Calibrate Display Color Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Digitizer or Touch Screen Replacement Explanation: Windows allows touch screen calibration through the “Calibrate Display Color” utility, useful after replacing or adjusting a digitizer.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-034 Question: Which Windows feature lets you verify whether a newly installed sound card is recognized by the system? a. Disk Management b. Device Manager c. Task Manager d. Services Console

Correct Answer: b. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Cards Using Windows Explanation: Device Manager displays whether hardware devices like sound cards are properly recognized and if drivers are installed.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-035 Question: A customer reports poor video performance after a display driver update. Which setting should the technician use to revert to the previous driver? a. Task Scheduler b. System Configuration c. Roll Back Driver d. System Restore Correct Answer: c. Roll Back Driver Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Video Explanation: The Roll Back Driver option in Device Manager allows technicians to revert to a previous version of a driver if a newer one causes issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-036 Question: Which Windows diagnostic tool can be used to view memory and video card information? a. dxdiag b. sfc c. msconfig d. devmgmt Correct Answer: a. dxdiag Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Video Memory Explanation: The dxdiag tool provides detailed information about the video adapter, video memory, and display settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-037 Question: Which of the following printer types uses a photosensitive drum and a fusing assembly to bond toner to paper? a. Laser printer b. Thermal printer

c. Inkjet printer d. Impact printer Correct Answer: a. Laser printer Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers Explanation: Laser printers use a multi-step process that includes transferring toner from a drum to paper and fusing it with heat and pressure.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-038 Question: Which printer type is most appropriate for printing multipart forms using carbon or carbonless paper? a. Thermal printer b. Laser printer c. Inkjet printer d. Impact printer Correct Answer: d. Impact printer Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printers Explanation: Impact printers, like dot matrix, physically strike the paper and are ideal for printing on multipart or continuous forms.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-039 Question: Which component in a laser printer is responsible for cleaning leftover toner from the drum? a. Transfer roller b. Fuser c. Cleaning blade d. Primary corona Correct Answer: c. Cleaning blade Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers Explanation: The cleaning blade removes any residual toner from the drum after printing to prepare it for the next job.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-040 Question: A customer complains that the printed output from their inkjet printer is smudging. What is the most likely cause? a. Low toner level b. Faulty fuser assembly c. Paper is too thick d. Ink has not dried properly Correct Answer: d. Ink has not dried properly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Inkjet Printers Explanation: Inkjet prints can smear if the ink does not dry completely or if low-quality paper is used.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-041 Question: Which print option allows you to save a document to a file format that cannot be easily edited but is viewable on most devices? a. Print to XPS b. Print to PDF c. Print to image d. Print to file Correct Answer: b. Print to PDF Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.10 Given a scenario, install applications according to requirements Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Virtual Printing Explanation: "Print to PDF" saves documents in a widely compatible, secure format suitable for sharing and archiving.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-042 Question: Which of the following actions helps protect personal data shared with mobile apps? a. Disable Airplane Mode. b. Turn off app notifications. c. Remove unnecessary app permissions. d. Use a physical keyboard.

Correct Answer: c. Remove unnecessary app permissions.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile OS and application security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features

Explanation: Mobile apps may request access to personal data. You can protect your data by removing unnecessary app permissions in the device’s privacy settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-043 Question: A technician is configuring a customer’s home router and wants to restrict access to only authorized wireless devices. Which setting should be enabled? a. Bluetooth pairing b. MAC address filtering c. NFC scanning d. GPS tracking Correct Answer: b. MAC address filtering Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.10 Given a scenario, apply security settings on SOHO wireless and wired networks Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Wi-Fi Analyzer Explanation: MAC address filtering is a SOHO wireless security method that limits network access to specified device MAC addresses.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-044 Question: Why is personal appearance important for IT professionals who troubleshoot mobile devices? a. It encourages others to be more professional. b. It helps build user trust and confidence. c. It encourages users to help resolve issues. d. It leads to faster resolution of issues.

Correct Answer: b. It helps build user trust and confidence.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Overview Explanation: A professional appearance helps establish credibility and trust with clients, which is critical in technical support roles.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-045 Question: Which mobile OS feature allows users to zoom in on a screen using two fingers? a. Pinch open b. Swipe c. Long touch d. Tap and hold Correct Answer: a. Pinch open Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems

Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Interacting with a Mobile Operating System Explanation: The pinch open gesture, or spreading two fingers apart, zooms in on mobile screens, helping users access details more clearly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-046 Question: What does GPS geotracking allow apps or services to do? a. Enable Airplane Mode. b. Track a device’s physical location. c. Improve multitouch responsiveness. d. Block all wireless communication.

Correct Answer: b. Track a device’s physical location.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features Explanation: Geotracking uses GPS to monitor a device’s movement and location, which some apps use to enhance service or functionality.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-047 Question: Which component is most important for a virtualization workstation running multiple virtual machines? a. High-definition sound card b. Dual monitors c. Maximum CPU cores and RAM d. Gaming GPU Correct Answer: c. Maximum CPU cores and RAM Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.9 Given a scenario, use remote access technologies.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Virtualization Workstations Explanation: Virtualization workstations require the highest possible CPU and memory resources to efficiently run multiple virtual machines.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-048 Question: What is the primary purpose of POST in the boot process? a. Launches the operating system b. Checks the power supply's wattage c. Tests and verifies hardware before booting d. Starts up user applications Correct Answer: c. Tests and verifies hardware before booting Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting

Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: The Boot Process Explanation: POST (Power-On Self-Test) checks for essential hardware functionality before the system boots into the OS. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-049 Question: Which of the following workstation types benefits most from high-end GPUs and maximum video RAM? a. Thin client b. Gaming PC c. Standard thick client d. Home server Correct Answer: b. Gaming PC Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Given a scenario, implement best practices associated with documentation and support systems information management.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Gaming PCs Explanation: Gaming PCs are built for performance and rely on advanced GPUs with large video RAM for graphics rendering.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-050 Question: Which is a best practice during Step 1 of the troubleshooting process? a. Reboot the system. b. Question the user and re-create the issue. c. Replace components. d. Format the drive.

Correct Answer: b. Question the user and re-create the issue.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Step 1. Identify the Problem Explanation: Gathering information from the user and recreating the problem are key elements in identifying the issue.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-051 Question: What does a single POST beep typically indicate? a. Successful hardware check b. RAM issue c. CPU failure d. Hard disk failure

Correct Answer: a. Successful hardware check Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: POST Codes and Error Messages Explanation: A single POST beep often signals that all hardware tests passed and no issues were detected.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-052 Question: Which browser feature verifies the authenticity of a website using HTTPS and a valid digital certificate? a. Ad blocker b. Certificate viewer c. Pop-up blocker d. Private browsing Correct Answer: b. Certificate viewer Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Security certificate verification Explanation: The certificate viewer lets users inspect HTTPS certificates to verify site authenticity and trust status.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-053 Question: What is the primary purpose of private browsing (Incognito/InPrivate) mode in modern browsers? a. It prevents tracking by antivirus software. b. It blocks all pop-ups and redirects. c. It does not store cookies, history, or temporary files. d. It disables HTTPS. Correct Answer: c. It does not store cookies, history, or temporary files.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Common web browser configuration settings Explanation: Private browsing prevents data from being saved locally, enhancing privacy.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-054 Question: Which browser issue may result from a rogue HOSTS file or redirection malware? a. Tab loading slowly b. Browser auto-sync disabled c. Homepage repeatedly changes to an unknown site d. Autofill suggestions fail

Correct Answer: c. Homepage repeatedly changes to an unknown site Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Basic Web Browser Issues Explanation: Redirect malware modifies browser behavior, such as changing the homepage or search engine.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-055 Question: What setting allows you to remove cookies, saved passwords, and browsing history in Microsoft Edge? a. Site isolation b. Privacy Sandbox c. Clear browsing data d. Reset browser Correct Answer: c. Clear browsing data Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Common web browser configuration settings Explanation: “Clear browsing data” allows users to remove saved private data for better privacy and troubleshooting.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-056 Question: A technician suspects a browser extension is causing pop-ups. What is the first step to confirm the cause? a. Reinstall the operating system. b. Reset the browser to factory settings. c. Disable all extensions and enable them one by one. d. Delete the HOSTS file.

Correct Answer: c. Disable all extensions and enable them one by one.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Degraded Browser Performance Explanation: The best approach is to isolate the issue by disabling all extensions and then enabling them individually.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-057 Question: Which Windows network type should you choose when connected to a public Wi-Fi hotspot to maximize security?

a. Workgroup b. Domain c. Private d. Public Correct Answer: d. Public Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.7 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows networking features on a client/desktop Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Windows network options Explanation: Public networks are used when connecting to unknown or untrusted networks. This setting disables device discovery and sharing, enhancing security.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-058 Question: What feature in Microsoft Windows helps users determine the appropriate security settings based on their current network connection? a. Network Profile b. Internet Explorer Settings c. Network Adapter Tool d. DHCP Scope Correct Answer: a. Network Profile Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.7 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows networking features on a client/desktop Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Windows network options Explanation: Windows uses network profiles to define the security and sharing behavior of a network, such as public or private.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-059 Question: A technician needs to verify the IPv6 address of a PC. Which command-line tool should they use? a. ping b. ipconfig c. netstat d. nslookup Correct Answer: b. ipconfig Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: IPv6 link-local address and IPv4 address

Explanation: The ipconfig command displays IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, as well as subnet mask and default gateway information.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-060 Question: What is the primary purpose of assigning a subnet mask in a TCP/IP configuration? a. To provide data encryption for transmission b. To define gateway routing paths c. To determine the network and host portions of an IP address d. To reserve addresses for DHCP Correct Answer: c. To determine the network and host portions of an IP address Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Subnet masks Explanation: A subnet mask identifies which part of the IP address corresponds to the network and which part identifies the host.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-061 Question: Which of the following provides basic encryption and authentication for a wireless network and is now considered insecure? a. WPA3 b. WPA2 c. WPA d. WEP Correct Answer: d. WEP Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Compare and contrast wireless security protocols and authentication methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless network standards Explanation: WEP is an outdated security protocol for wireless networks and is no longer considered secure due to its vulnerabilities.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-062 Question: Which of the following is an open-source operating system that allows anyone to modify its code without permission? a. Linux b. Windows 11 c. macOS d. Chrome OS Correct Answer: a. Linux Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Overview of Popular Operating Systems Explanation: Linux is an open source OS developed collaboratively, allowing users to freely modify and distribute its code. macOS and Windows are proprietary, and Chrome OS is also limited to Google-managed hardware.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-063 Question: Which Windows edition is designed for high-end workloads and supports up to 6 TB of RAM and 4 CPUs? a. Windows 11 Home b. Windows 11 Enterprise c. Windows 11 Pro Education d. Windows 11 Pro for Workstations Correct Answer: d. Windows 11 Pro for Workstations Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Compare and contrast basic features of Microsoft Windows editions Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Windows 11 Versions Explanation: Windows 11 Pro for Workstations is intended for data-intensive users and supports advanced hardware configurations, including 6 TB of RAM and multiple CPUs. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-064 Question: Which of the following would most likely cause an OS upgrade to fail due to a missing manufacturer update? a. Incompatible GUI b. Misconfigured registry key c. Outdated driver d. Excessive RAM Correct Answer: c. Outdated driver Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Update Limitations Explanation: Outdated drivers may not be compatible with the new OS, leading to setup errors or hardware malfunctions during upgrades.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-065 Question: Which feature allows technicians to quickly view and manage multiple open windows or create virtual desktops in Windows 11? a. Registry Editor b. Task View c. File Explorer d. Disk Management

Correct Answer: b. Task View Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Task View Explanation: Task View lets users see all open apps in a visual layout and supports the creation of multiple desktops for organizing workflows.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-066 Question: Which of the following Windows 11 utilities provides encryption for individual files and folders? a. TPM b. BitLocker c. Encrypting File System (EFS) d. Credential Manager Correct Answer: c. Encrypting File System (EFS) Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Encrypting File System (EFS) Explanation: EFS encrypts specific files or folders, unlike BitLocker, which encrypts entire drives. It is only available in Pro, Enterprise, and Education editions.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-067 Question: Which command is used to create a new directory from the command prompt? a. cd b. md c. rd d. dir Correct Answer: b. md Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The md or mkdir Command Explanation: The md or mkdir command is used to make a new directory from the current location shown in the prompt.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-068 Question: What command displays a list of files and directories from your current directory in the command prompt? a. list

b. show c. path d. dir Correct Answer: d. dir Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The dir Command Explanation: The dir command lists the files and directories at the current command prompt location.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-069 Question: Which command is used to display the contents of a text file at the command prompt? a. read b. open c. type d. list Correct Answer: c. type Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The type Command Explanation: The type command displays the contents of a file such as a .txt file directly in the command-line window.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-070 Question: What is the purpose of the attrib +h command? a. Show file size. b. Delete hidden files. c. Make a file hidden. d. Compress a file.

Correct Answer: c. Make a file hidden.

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The attrib Command Explanation: The attrib +h command assigns the hidden attribute to a file, making it invisible in standard directory listings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-071 Question: Which Windows utility allows you to view and manage hardware drivers, roll back drivers, and troubleshoot hardware conflicts? a. Task Manager

b. System Configuration c. Services d. Device Manager Correct Answer: d. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, Use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Device Manager Explanation: Device Manager is a key tool in Windows for viewing installed devices, updating or rolling back drivers, and resolving hardware issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-072 Question: Which type of Windows installation allows user files and settings to be preserved while updating to a new OS version? a. Clean install b. Repair installation c. In-place upgrade d. Image deployment Correct Answer: c. In-place upgrade Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Given a scenario,Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: In-Place Upgrade or Clean Install Explanation: An in-place upgrade keeps user data and configuration while updating to a newer version of Windows.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-073 Question: Which Windows feature allows you to restore the operating system to a previous configuration without affecting user data files? a. Recovery partition b. System Restore c. Safe Mode d. Device Manager Correct Answer: b. System Restore Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: System Restore Explanation: System Restore creates restore points to revert system files and settings to an earlier state, helping resolve issues caused by recent changes.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-074 Question: Which file system is best suited for large hard drives and supports features like file permissions, compression, and journaling? a. FAT32 b. exFAT c. ReFS d. NTFS Correct Answer: d. NTFS Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: File System Types Explanation: NTFS is the preferred file system for Windows installations due to its support for large volumes and advanced features like security and compression.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-075 Question: Which command can convert a FAT32 partition to NTFS without data loss? a. format /fs:ntfs b. diskpart convert c. convert x: /fs:ntfs d. chkdsk /f Correct Answer: c. convert x: /fs:ntfs Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Planning Drive Space Explanation: The convert command can be used to convert FAT16 or FAT32 file systems to NTFS without losing existing data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-076 Question: Which macOS feature provides a grid-based view of all installed applications and allows users to launch apps directly? a. Spotlight b. Finder c. Dock d. Launchpad Correct Answer: d. Launchpad Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Navigating the User Interface

Explanation: Launchpad is a grid-based application launcher in macOS that displays all installed apps and allows users to launch them directly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-077 Question: Which macOS utility allows users to perform full and incremental system backups and navigate through past backups in a timeline interface? a. Disk Utility b. iCloud c. Time Machine d. Activity Monitor Correct Answer: c. Time Machine Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Time Machine Explanation: Time Machine is the built-in macOS backup utility that supports full and incremental backups with a user-friendly timeline interface.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-078 Question: What is the name of the default file manager in Ubuntu Linux? a. Finder b. Nautilus c. Terminal d. Dash Correct Answer: b. Nautilus Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Navigating the User Interface Explanation: Nautilus is the default file manager in Ubuntu Linux and is used for browsing files and directories.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-079 Question: Which of the following commands is used in macOS to stop a non-responding application from the command line? a. halt b. rm c. kill d. sudo Correct Answer: c. kill Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems

Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Force Quit Explanation: The kill command in Terminal allows users to stop a process by providing its process ID. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-080 Question: What macOS utility provides detailed information about system hardware, software, and network configurations? a. Disk Utility b. Console c. System Information d. Activity Monitor Correct Answer: c. System Information Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: System Information Explanation: System Information provides an overview of Mac hardware, software, and network settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-081 Question: Which policy element in a company’s security policy defines who can access specific parts of a building and how access is logged? a. Password policy b. Acceptable use policy c. Physical access d. Regulatory compliance Correct Answer: c. Physical access Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Security Policy Explanation: Physical access policies define who may enter certain building areas, how entry is granted (e.g., badges, keys), and how access is logged for auditing.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-082 Question: What is the main security benefit of using electronic key cards instead of metal keys? a. They prevent tailgating. b. They support biometric authentication. c. They are easier to reprogram and manage.

d. They require a password for access.

Correct Answer: c. They are easier to reprogram and manage.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Physical Security Explanation: Electronic key cards can be issued or revoked quickly without changing locks, making them easier to manage than metal keys.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-083 Question: Which device is used to prevent shoulder surfing in shared workspaces? a. Cable lock b. Privacy screen c. Motion sensor d. RFID tag Correct Answer: b. Privacy screen Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Physical Security Explanation: Privacy screens limit screen visibility to users directly in front of the monitor, preventing nearby individuals from viewing sensitive data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-084 Question: Which method ensures secure access to corporate resources over an untrusted network? a. Secure Boot b. VPN c. ACL d. Port security Correct Answer: b. VPN Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Logical Security Explanation: A VPN creates an encrypted connection over an untrusted network (like the internet), securing remote access to corporate data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-085 Question: Which malware type poses a threat by encrypting data and demanding payment to restore access? a. Keylogger

b. Rootkit c. Trojan d. Ransomware Correct Answer: d. Ransomware Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.4 Summarize types of malware and tools/methods for detection, removal, and prevention Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Malware Explanation: Ransomware encrypts files or systems and requires the victim to pay to regain access, often in cryptocurrency.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-086 Question: Which type of fire extinguisher is specifically designed for electrical fires in IT environments? a. Type A b. Type B c. Type C d. Type D Correct Answer: c. Type C Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Fire Safety Explanation: Type C fire extinguishers are made specifically for electrical fires and are safe to use on IT equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-087 Question: Which of the following should be avoided when cleaning spilled laser printer toner? a. Using a HEPA-filtered vacuum b. Wearing nitrile gloves c. Using a regular vacuum cleaner d. Wearing a dust mask Correct Answer: c. Using a regular vacuum cleaner Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Toner Safety and Disposal Explanation: Regular vacuums can become damaged or cause toner to melt inside the motor; a HEPA vacuum is recommended.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-088 Question: What type of documentation typically includes information like hardware serial

numbers and assigned users? a. Knowledge base b. Service-level agreement c. Asset management record d. Network topology diagram Correct Answer: c. Asset management record Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Documentation and support systems Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Asset Management Explanation: Asset management systems track details like serial numbers, model information, assigned users, and licensing.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-089 Question: What is the term for the documented timeframe in which planned IT changes are executed? a. Emergency change b. Freeze period c. Change window d. Maintenance window Correct Answer: d. Maintenance window Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Change management procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Change Management Explanation: A maintenance window is a predefined time frame for executing planned changes such as upgrades or patches.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-090 Question: Which method is recommended to safely dispose of a swollen lithium-ion battery? a. Place it in a standard trash bin. b. Recycle it at a regulated station. c. Submerge it in water and discard it. d. Throw it in an electronics recycling bin without a bag.

Correct Answer: b. Recycle it at a regulated station.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Electronic Disposal/Recycling Explanation: Swollen or damaged Li-ion batteries must be taken to regulated recycling stations due to the risk of fire or explosion.

202-1202 TEST BANK 2 Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-001 Question: What is the first step in safely installing an internal adapter card? a. Reconnect the power cord. b. Load the device driver. c. Follow manufacturer instructions and wear an antistatic strap. d. Power on the system.

Correct Answer: c. Follow manufacturer instructions and wear an antistatic strap.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: How to identify an adapter’s function Explanation: Before touching internal components, technicians should use ESD protection like an antistatic strap and follow documented procedures.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-002 Question: A user spills coffee on their keyboard. What is the technician’s best immediate response? a. Unplug the keyboard and turn it upside down. b. Plug in the keyboard to test it. c. Tell the user to dry the keys with a towel. d. Use a hair dryer to remove the moisture.

Correct Answer: a. Unplug the keyboard and turn it upside down.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard/Mouse Troubleshooting Explanation: To prevent electrical damage, unplugging and turning over the keyboard is the safest and most effective initial response.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-003 Question: A technician listens to a user describe a printer issue. Which action demonstrates poor communication skills? a. Suggesting a solution as the user is explaining the issue b. Asking open-ended follow-up questions c. Asking for clarity and repeating the user’s concern d. Making eye contact and taking notes Correct Answer: a. Suggesting a solution as the user is explaining the issue Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT

Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Interrupting a user breaks the flow of communication and shows a lack of respect and patience—both essential in technical support roles.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-004 Question: Which of the following is a best practice for safely cleaning an optical mouse? a. Use water and soap on the sensor. b. Spray cleaning fluid directly onto the mouse. c. Wipe the bottom with a damp cloth and use compressed air. d. Soak the mouse in alcohol for 5 minutes.

Correct Answer: c. Wipe the bottom with a damp cloth and use compressed air.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Mouse and Keyboard Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Proper cleaning involves using lint-free cloths and compressed air, which are safe and effective on optical sensors.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-005 Question: Why is it important to avoid tunnel vision when troubleshooting computer issues? a. It helps consider all possible causes of a problem. b. It ensures better performance tuning. c. It improves your typing accuracy. d. It saves time by focusing on only one possible fix.

Correct Answer: a. It helps consider all possible causes of a problem.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Avoiding tunnel vision allows technicians to stay open to multiple potential causes, leading to more effective problem-solving.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-006 Question: What is the purpose of the tang on an Ethernet cable's RJ45 connector? a. It ensures waterproofing for outdoor use. b. It allows the connector to lock securely into a port. c. It transmits PoE signals. d. It prevents crosstalk between twisted pairs.

Correct Answer: b. It allows the connector to lock securely into a port.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: The tang on an RJ45 connector clicks into place to secure the Ethernet cable in the port and must be pressed down to release it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-007 Question: Which port type allows charging even when the computer is powered off? a. USB 2.0 b. USB-C c. Sleep-and-charge USB d. eSATAp Correct Answer: c. Sleep-and-charge USB Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Hubs Explanation: Sleep-and-charge USB ports continue to deliver power for charging devices even when the host computer is shut down.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-008 Question: Which connector is most likely to be used with a fiber-optic cable for long-distance backbone communication? a. LC b. DB9 c. RJ11 d. F-type Correct Answer: a. LC Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Fiber Media Explanation: LC (Lucent Connector) is commonly used in fiber-optic networking, especially for long-distance, high-speed backbone infrastructure.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-009 Question: Which statement best describes the function of a punchdown tool? a. It secures HDMI cables to video cards. b. It crimps RJ45 connectors onto UTP cables. c. It connects network wires to a patch panel. d. It fastens USB-C ports onto motherboards.

Correct Answer: c. It connects network wires to a patch panel.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: A punchdown tool pushes individual wires into terminals on a patch panel or keystone jack, ensuring a secure and permanent connection.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-03-010 Question: A technician is speaking with a frustrated user. What is the most appropriate first step in active listening? a. Begin testing hardware immediately. b. Review the system logs. c. Ask the user to reboot the system. d. Let the user explain the issue without interruption.

Correct Answer: d. Let the user explain the issue without interruption.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Allowing the customer to fully explain the issue without interruption is a foundational element of active listening.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-03-011 Question: Which of the following contributes most to a negative customer experience during a service call? a. Asking follow-up questions b. Using a warm and caring tone c. Speaking in acronyms and technical terms d. Confirming the issue before troubleshooting Correct Answer: c. Speaking in acronyms and technical terms Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Using technical jargon can confuse or alienate customers and should be avoided in favor of plain, clear language.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-03-012 Question: How should a technician respond when unsure about a customer's description of a problem?

a. Immediately begin fixing what they think is wrong. b. Argue with the customer to clarify. c. Restate the customer’s concern to confirm understanding. d. Ask the customer to call back later.

Correct Answer: c. Restate the customer’s concern to confirm understanding.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Summarizing and confirming the customer’s statements ensures mutual understanding and supports accurate troubleshooting.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-013 Question: What is a key best practice when troubleshooting hardware configuration issues? a. Reset CMOS before each test. b. Change all components simultaneously. c. Test multiple solutions at once. d. Change only one thing at a time and document.

Correct Answer: d. Change only one thing at a time and document.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Given a scenario, implement best practices associated with documentation and support systems information management Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: A Good Technician practice Explanation: Changing only one variable at a time allows accurate identification of the root cause and simplifies documentation.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-014 Question: Which Device Manager status symbol indicates that a device has been disabled? a. Yellow exclamation mark b. Blue question mark c. Gray X d. Down arrow Correct Answer: d. Down arrow Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Configurations Explanation: A down arrow in Device Manager means the device is disabled but not necessarily malfunctioning.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-015 Question: Which setting in BIOS/UEFI must be enabled to use virtualization features in Windows? a. Secure Boot b. TPM c. ACPI d. Virtualization Technology Correct Answer: d. Virtualization Technology Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Given a scenario, perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: BIOS/UEFI Configuration Settings Explanation: Virtualization Technology must be enabled in BIOS/UEFI for hypervisors to access hardware features.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-016 Question: If a technician installs a USB device before its required driver, what problem might occur? a. Device fails to work properly b. BIOS lockout c. USB power surge d. Hard drive corruption Correct Answer: a. Device fails to work properly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile OS and application issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Installing a USB Device Explanation: Installing a USB device before its driver may result in misconfiguration or failure to operate correctly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-017 Question: What is the purpose of flashing the BIOS/UEFI? a. Reset CMOS settings. b. Install a new operating system. c. Update firmware for improved hardware support. d. Change boot device priority.

Correct Answer: c. Update firmware for improved hardware support.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.3 Given a scenario, implement workstation backup and recovery methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Flashing/Clearing the BIOS/UEFI

Explanation: Flashing BIOS/UEFI updates the firmware to fix bugs, enhance security, or support new hardware.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-018 Question: Why should technicians avoid using magnetic screwdrivers inside a computer? a. They void manufacturer warranties. b. They can damage sensitive components like memory. c. They corrode metal parts. d. They cause short circuits in CPUs. Correct Answer: b. They can damage sensitive components like memory.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Tools Explanation: Magnetic screwdrivers can disrupt memory modules or leave magnetic fields that may affect sensitive parts.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-019 Question: Which behavior demonstrates professionalism when documenting a repair? a. Recording clear, complete, and timely notes b. Delaying updates until the next shift c. Writing brief notes using slang and abbreviations d. Avoiding written documentation to save time Correct Answer: a. Recording clear, complete, and timely notes Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Written Communication Skills Explanation: Accurate and timely documentation helps future technicians and reflects well on professional conduct.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-020 Question: According to professional email etiquette, what should a technician avoid? a. Using a subject line b. Writing while angry c. Typing too fast d. Sending too many follow-up emails Correct Answer: b. Writing while angry Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power

Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Written Communication Skills Explanation: Writing while angry can result in unprofessional messages. It is best to wait and respond calmly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-021 Question: What is the most appropriate way to transport unused adapters during a disassembly? a. Stack them on top of each other. b. Wrap them in paper towels. c. Place them in ESD-safe bags. d. Store them loosely in a toolbox.

Correct Answer: c. Place them in ESD-safe bags.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Disassembly Explanation: ESD-safe bags protect components from static damage while in storage or transport.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-022 Question: Which tool is specifically designed to remove dust from tight spots without generating static? a. Toner vacuum b. Urethane swab c. Diagonal cutter d. Antistatic brush Correct Answer: d. Antistatic brush Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.5 Summarize environmental impacts and local environment controls Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Antistatic brushes are used to remove dust from tight areas without generating static electricity.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-023 Question: In Task Manager’s Memory Composition view, what does the “Standby” section represent? a. Memory used by the BIOS b. Memory that is currently being written to disk c. Cached memory not actively used d. Reserved memory for video processing Correct Answer: c. Cached memory not actively used Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Monitoring Memory Usage in Windows Explanation: The Standby section shows cached memory that is available but not currently in active use.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-024 Question: Why should a technician use the Compatibility tab in Windows properties for an older application? a. To run the app as if on an older Windows version b. To select a different network adapter c. To assign administrative privileges d. To optimize memory allocation Correct Answer: a. To run the app as if on an older Windows version Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Older Applications in Windows Explanation: Compatibility mode allows legacy applications to run in newer Windows environments by simulating older OS settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-025 Question: A technician adds new RAM, but the system does not boot. What is the best first troubleshooting step? a. Update the GPU firmware. b. Reseat the memory module. c. Reinstall the operating system. d. Disable virtualization in BIOS. Correct Answer: b. Reseat the memory module.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: If the system fails to boot after a RAM upgrade, the memory module may not be fully seated in the slot.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-026 Question: Which field in Task Manager shows how much physical memory is currently available for use? a. Paged Pool b. Cached c. Available d. In Use

Correct Answer: c. Available Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Monitoring Memory Usage in Windows Explanation: The "Available" field displays the amount of memory ready for use by apps and services.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-027 Question: What is a recommended action before physically installing RAM into a desktop system? a. Run Windows Memory Diagnostic. b. Disable firewall settings. c. Connect the PC to a surge protector. d. Disconnect power and use ESD protection.

Correct Answer: d. Disconnect power and use ESD protection.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Removing/Installing Memory Explanation: To prevent damage to components, always power down and follow proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling memory.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-028 Question: Which key combination can be used to restart a PC into recovery mode if the pagefile is corrupted? a. Shift + Restart b. Alt + F4 c. Ctrl + Shift + Esc d. Ctrl + Alt + Del Correct Answer: a. Shift + Restart Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Virtual Memory Explanation: Holding Shift while clicking Restart enters the Windows Recovery Environment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-029 Question: Which of the following features allows dynamic expansion of storage using multiple drives in Windows? a. RAID 0 b. Storage Spaces c. NTFS

d. Disk Cleanup Correct Answer: b. Storage Spaces Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Windows Storage Spaces Explanation: Windows Storage Spaces allow users to pool multiple disks and configure them for performance or redundancy.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-030 Question: Which Windows utility is used to locate and replace corrupted system files? a. sfc /scannow b. convert /fs:ntfs c. diskpart d. msconfig Correct Answer: a. sfc /scannow Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Data Loss and Corruption Explanation: The 'sfc /scannow' command scans and restores corrupted system files.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-031 Question: What should a technician check first if a newly installed SSD is not recognized by the system? a. File system format b. Motherboard chipset temperature c. Proper seating in the connector d. Cloud sync settings Correct Answer: c. Proper seating in the connector Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting New Storage Device Installation Explanation: Improper seating of an SSD in its connector can prevent BIOS/UEFI from detecting it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-032 Question: Which tool can a technician use to analyze disk fragmentation on a Windows system? a. Disk Management b. Task Manager c. Disk Cleanup d. Defragment and Optimize Drives

Correct Answer: d. Defragment and Optimize Drives Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Dealing with Slow Performance Explanation: Defragment and Optimize Drives helps improve mechanical hard drive performance by reorganizing fragmented files.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-033 Question: Which trait reflects a proactive and professional IT technician attitude when resolving customer concerns? a. Preserving company reputation b. Waiting for management before responding to a user c. Seeking solutions instead of making excuses d. Focusing solely on the technical problem Correct Answer: c. Seeking solutions instead of making excuses Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Attitude Explanation: A professional technician is proactive and solutions-oriented, communicating positively even during technical challenges.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-034 Question: A user reports no sound from their speakers. The technician checks the Windows taskbar and sees an “x” over the sound icon. What should be checked first? a. HDMI port b. System BIOS c. Device Manager d. Muted volume setting Correct Answer: d. Muted volume setting Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Cards Using Windows Explanation: A muted sound icon on the taskbar indicates the volume is muted; this is one of the first troubleshooting steps.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-035 Question: Which of the following actions best demonstrates professionalism when a customer becomes frustrated about display issues? a. Blaming the manufacturer’s hardware

b. Raising your voice to establish authority c. Reassuring the customer and explaining the next steps d. Pointing out that the customer caused the issue Correct Answer: c. Reassuring the customer and explaining the next steps Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Attitude Explanation: Maintaining professionalism and guiding the customer through the troubleshooting process helps ease tension and builds trust.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-036 Question: After replacing a digitizer, which Windows tool helps confirm that the device is functioning and properly connected? a. System Configuration b. Services Console c. Reliability Monitor d. Device Manager Correct Answer: d. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Digitizer or Touch Screen Replacement Explanation: Device Manager allows you to verify that hardware, such as digitizers, is correctly installed and recognized.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-037 Question: What should a technician do if a projector is connected but displays nothing and the customer is visibly annoyed? a. Continue working until the issue is resolved. b. Politely explain how the customer misused the projector. c. Politely explain that you are checking the input source. d. Replace the projector immediately.

Correct Answer: c. Politely explain that you are checking the input source.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Projector Troubleshooting Explanation: The correct professional response includes calmly informing the user about your troubleshooting steps, such as verifying the projector’s input source.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-038 Question: Which feature must be enabled to allow other computers on a network to print to a shared USB printer on a Windows workstation? a. File and Printer Sharing b. Printer Spooling c. Network Discovery d. Remote Assistance Correct Answer: a. File and Printer Sharing Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.7 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows networking features on a client/desktop Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Printer Sharing Explanation: File and Printer Sharing must be enabled in Windows settings to allow network access to shared printers.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-039 Question: What does a duplexing assembly enable a printer to do? a. Print wirelessly b. Print to PDF c. Print on both sides of the paper d. Use high-capacity paper trays Correct Answer: c. Print on both sides of the paper Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Paper Explanation: A duplexing assembly allows a printer to automatically print on both sides of a page.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-040 Question: Which of the following is a safety precaution when replacing a toner cartridge in a laser printer? a. Shake the toner cartridge to mix the toner. b. Wear a dust mask to avoid inhaling toner. c. Keep the cartridge in direct sunlight. d. Use compressed air to blow out loose toner.

Correct Answer: b. Wear a dust mask to avoid inhaling toner.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Refilling Cartridges, Re-inking Ribbons, and Recycling Cartridges

Explanation: Toner is a fine powder and can be harmful if inhaled, so a dust mask is recommended when handling it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-041 Question: Which of the following is a common cause of a faint printout from an impact printer? a. Worn-out ribbon b. Misaligned roller c. Dirty paper d. Bad print driver Correct Answer: a. Worn-out ribbon Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printer Maintenance Explanation: A fading or faint printout on an impact printer typically indicates the need for ribbon replacement.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-042 Question: In a thermal printer, what is a likely cause of missing or faded print areas? a. Empty ink cartridge b. Dirty heating element c. Low toner d. Misaligned drum Correct Answer: b. Dirty heating element Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Thermal Printer Maintenance Explanation: Thermal printers use a heating element to print; if it is dirty, parts of the image may not appear.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-043 Question: An Android user reports that an app crashes every time it is opened. What is the technician's first troubleshooting step? a. Remove the SIM card b. Perform a factory reset c. Restart the device d. Disable Wi-Fi Correct Answer: c. Restart the device Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile OS and application issues

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features Explanation: Restarting a mobile device can resolve many application issues by clearing temporary memory and app conflicts.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-044 Question: What is the most secure way to dispose of a mobile device that contained sensitive company data? a. Recycle it with a certified vendor. b. Donate it to a school. c. Sell it online. d. Give it to another employee.

Correct Answer: a. Recycle it with a certified vendor.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Compare and contrast common data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Management Explanation: A certified e-waste recycler ensures proper data destruction and environmentally safe disposal.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-045 Question: A technician is helping a user enable fingerprint authentication on an Android phone.

Which security setting is the technician configuring? a. Encryption b. Biometric authentication c. Application permissions d. Hotspot tethering Correct Answer: b. Biometric authentication Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Given a scenario, configure and apply basic Microsoft Windows OS security settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features Explanation: Fingerprint authentication is a biometric method that enhances device security through physical traits.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-046 Question: Which action should a technician recommend to improve mobile device security when installing apps? a. Install apps from third-party websites. b. Use airplane mode during installation. c. Install apps only from trusted app stores. d. Avoid using a lock screen.

Correct Answer: c. Install apps only from trusted app stores.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, apply common methods for securing mobile devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Obtaining, Installing, and Removing Apps Explanation: Trusted app stores screen apps for malware and other security risks, making them safer than unknown sources.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-047 Question: Which mobile OS is based on the Linux kernel and is most commonly used on smartphones? a. Windows b. Android c. Chrome OS d. iOS Correct Answer: b. Android Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Operating System Basics and Features Explanation: Android is an open-source operating system based on the Linux kernel and is the most widely used mobile OS. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-048 Question: What component is typically not found in a thin client? a. Local storage b. Network adapter c. Display d. Keyboard Correct Answer: a. Local storage Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Thin Client Workstations Explanation: Thin clients rely on network-based resources and usually lack significant local storage.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-049 Question: Which type of error is typically indicated by a BIOS POST beep code of three beeps? a. CPU failure b. Video card issue c. Battery failure d. Motherboard or chipset error

Correct Answer: d. Motherboard or chipset error Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: POST Codes and Error Messages Explanation: Three POST beeps in many systems (like Dell) indicate an issue with the motherboard or chipset.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-050 Question: Which of the following is a proper step when dealing with a difficult customer? a. Correct their misunderstanding. b. Remain quiet to avoid escalation. c. Stay calm and use assertive communication. d. Escalate the issue immediately without attempting resolution.

Correct Answer: c. Stay calm and use assertive communication.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Dealing with Difficult Customers Explanation: Assertive but respectful communication helps manage challenging interactions while maintaining professionalism.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-051 Question: Which system type benefits most from surround sound and large hard drives? a. Audio/video editing workstation b. Thin client c. NAS d. Virtualization workstation Correct Answer: a. Audio/video editing workstation Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Audio/Video Editing Workstations Explanation: These systems require high-performance storage and audio subsystems for editing and playback.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-052 Question: Which of the following is part of Step 6 in the troubleshooting process? a. Implementing the solution b. Replacing defective hardware c. Documenting actions taken d. Rebooting the system

Correct Answer: c. Documenting actions taken Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Step 6. Document the Findings, Actions, and Outcomes Explanation: Documenting what was done ensures future techs and the customer understand the issue and solution.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-053 Question: What tool within Google Chrome provides process-level control over running browser components? a. Chrome Config Manager b. Task Manager c. Troubleshoot Mode d. Secure DNS Correct Answer: b. Task Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Browser troubleshooting tools Explanation: Chrome’s built-in Task Manager helps identify and end processes causing performance issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-054 Question: Which of the following browser settings helps prevent DNS hijacking by encrypting web address lookups? a. Secure DNS b. Private browsing c. Safe mode d. Proxy settings Correct Answer: a. Secure DNS Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Secure DNS Explanation: Secure DNS encrypts DNS queries to prevent manipulation and improve privacy.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-055 Question: Which of the following is a legitimate remediation step if a browser redirect issue persists after clearing history and resetting settings? a. Enable JavaScript. b. Boot into Safe Mode with Networking.

c. Delete bookmarks. d. Turn off antivirus.

Correct Answer: b. Boot into Safe Mode with Networking.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Basic Web Browser Issues Explanation: Safe Mode with Networking can help determine if a third-party add-on or malware is interfering with browser operation.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-056 Question: What should a technician check first if a user complains that all websites are loading slowly in their browser, but other applications run fine? a. Clear OS logs. b. Reset firewall rules. c. Restart DHCP services. d. Check browser extensions.

Correct Answer: d. Check browser extensions.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Degraded Browser Performance Explanation: Slow browser performance can result from misbehaving or excessive extensions.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-057 Question: Which of the following helps reduce browser performance issues and removes temporary web data? a. Disable Java. b. Run a full OS restore. c. Clear cache. d. Format the local disk.

Correct Answer: c. Clear cache.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Degraded Browser Performance Explanation: Clearing the browser cache can help resolve display and speed issues caused by corrupted or outdated data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-058 Question: Which wireless standard supports operation in the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz frequency bands and is designed for efficient multi-device use? a. 802.11ac b. 802.11g c. 802.11ax d. 802.11n Correct Answer: c. 802.11ax Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Compare and contrast wireless security protocols and authentication methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless network standards Explanation: 802.11ax (Wi-Fi 6 and 6E) operates in the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz bands and supports multiple simultaneous data streams.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-059 Question: In a SOHO wireless network, what is the role of hiding the SSID? a. Masks the network from casual discovery b. Prevents all devices from connecting c. Encrypts the wireless signal d. Guarantees stronger performance Correct Answer: a. Masks the network from casual discovery Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.10 Given a scenario, apply security settings on SOHO wireless and wired networks Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Configuring SSIDs and SSID broadcasting Explanation: Hiding the SSID prevents it from appearing in the list of available networks, adding a layer of obscurity but not encryption.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-060 Question: A technician suspects unauthorized wireless access to a small business network.

Which Windows feature should they check to ensure the network is not discoverable? a. IP address b. Network location setting c. MAC address d. Subnet mask Correct Answer: b. Network location setting Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.10 Given a scenario, apply security settings on SOHO wireless and wired networks

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Windows network options Explanation: Choosing the correct network location setting (e.g., Public) can help ensure the device is not discoverable by other devices on the network.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-061 Question: A user reports suspicious traffic on their home Wi-Fi. Which of the following is the best first step? a. Increase the DHCP lease time. b. Disable IPv6. c. Check the wireless router client list. d. Install a loopback plug.

Correct Answer: c. Check the wireless router client list.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless network design Explanation: The client list on a router shows which devices are currently connected, helping identify unauthorized users.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-062 Question: A user cannot access a private network resource and suspects a misconfigured IP address. Which Windows tool can confirm the current IP configuration? a. chkdsk b. ipconfig c. tracert d. net use Correct Answer: b. ipconfig Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: IPv6 link-local address and IPv4 address Explanation: ipconfig is the primary command-line tool for displaying current TCP/IP network configuration information.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-063 Question: What tool would a technician use to manually change advanced settings stored in the Windows registry? a. Control Panel b. Task Manager c. File Explorer d. regedit.exe

Correct Answer: d. regedit.exe Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Editing the Windows Registry Explanation: The regedit.exe utility allows technicians to view and edit the Windows registry, which contains system and application settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-064 Question: Which of the following describes a key limitation of using 32-bit versions of Windows? a. They cannot connect to wireless networks. b. They cannot use graphical user interfaces. c. They cannot access more than 4 GB of RAM. d. They do not support file encryption.

Correct Answer: c. They cannot access more than 4 GB of RAM. Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: 32-Bit vs. 64-Bit Operating Systems Explanation: 32-bit operating systems have a memory addressing limit that prevents them from using more than 4 GB of RAM. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-065 Question: Which section in Windows 11 Settings allows users to manage options like Display, Sound, and Storage? a. Network & Internet b. System c. Accessibility d. Apps Correct Answer: b. System Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Introduction to Windows Settings Explanation: The System section of the Windows Settings app includes configuration categories such as Display, Sound, Power, Storage, and more.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-066 Question: Which feature allows a user to restore an operating system's previous configuration without affecting personal files? a. Factory reset b. System Restore

c. BitLocker d. Disk Cleanup Correct Answer: b. System Restore Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Recovering the Windows OS Explanation: System Restore reverts the system configuration to an earlier point without altering user data, unlike full recovery tools.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-067 Question: A user wants to change how file extensions are displayed in File Explorer. Where should they go? a. Settings > Apps b. File Explorer > View > Show > File name extensions c. Control Panel > Programs and Features d. Settings > Accessibility > File Options Correct Answer: b. File Explorer > View > Show > File name extensions Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: File Explorer View Options Explanation: File extensions can be shown by enabling the “File name extensions” checkbox under the View menu in File Explorer.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-068 Question: What does the cd.. command do at the command prompt? a. Moves to the root directory b. Changes the disk c. Exits the command prompt d. Moves up one directory level Correct Answer: d. Moves up one directory level Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The cd Command Explanation: The cd.. command moves up one directory level by referencing the parent directory.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-069 Question: What is a key benefit of using scripting in IT operations? a. Requires less training b. Allows graphical user interfaces

c. Automates repetitive tasks d. Prevents operating system crashes Correct Answer: c. Automates repetitive tasks Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.8 Explain the basics of scripting Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Scripting Overview Explanation: Scripts automate tasks to increase consistency and reduce manual effort and human error.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-070 Question: Which scripting language is designed specifically for managing Windows environments? a. PowerShell b. Python c. JavaScript d. VBScript Correct Answer: a. PowerShell Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.8 Explain the basics of scripting Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: PowerShell Explanation: PowerShell is a powerful scripting language developed by Microsoft for automating Windows administrative tasks.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-071 Question: Which symbol is used in a command to display output one page at a time? a. / b. | c. > d. * Correct Answer: b. | Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: TECH TIP: Make a command output one page at a time Explanation: The pipe symbol (|) is used with the more command to display long output one page at a time.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-072 Question: What is the proper syntax to copy a file from C:\ to E:\ using the command prompt? a. copy C:\ E:\ b. copy C:\file.txt E:\ c. move C:\file.txt E:\

d. cp C:\file.txt E:\ Correct Answer: b. copy C:\file.txt E:\ Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Copying Files Explanation: The correct syntax for copying a file includes the copy command, the full path of the source file, and the destination.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-073 Question: Which partition style allows partitions larger than 2 TB and is required for UEFI BIOS? a. MBR b. GPT c. Dynamic d. Extended Correct Answer: b. GPT Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Types of Partitions Explanation: The GPT (GUID Partition Table) supports large partitions and is required by UEFIbased systems.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-074 Question: What is the purpose of the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (ADK)? a. To manage user accounts in Active Directory b. To deploy Linux-based operating systems c. To customize and deploy Windows images at scale d. To remove malware from corporate systems Correct Answer: c. To customize and deploy Windows images at scale Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Corporate Windows Deployment Explanation: The ADK provides tools for creating and deploying customized Windows installations across enterprise environments.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-075 Question: What Windows utility can be used to back up specific user libraries and schedule backups? a. System Restore b. File History

c. Disk Management d. Task Scheduler Correct Answer: b. File History Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.3 Implement workstation backup and recovery methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Backing Up the Windows Registry and Data Explanation: File History is a backup utility that focuses on user libraries and allows scheduled backups to external drives.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-076 Question: Which issue would most likely cause the error "No boot device available" after installing Windows? a. Missing antivirus software b. Wrong boot order in BIOS c. Incorrect driver for sound card d. Expired Windows license Correct Answer: b. Wrong boot order in BIOS Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting a Windows Installation Explanation: This error is commonly caused when BIOS/UEFI is not set to boot from the drive that contains the operating system.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-077 Question: Which Linux command is used to view all active processes and organize them in a tree format? a. top b. ps aux c. ls -l d. ps faux Correct Answer: d. ps faux Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Viewing Processes Explanation: The ps faux command shows all running processes in a hierarchical tree format.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-078 Question: Which built-in Ubuntu application allows users to perform encrypted backups and

supports remote destinations? a. App Center b. rsync c. Time Machine d. Backups Correct Answer: d. Backups Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Basic System Usage, Updates, and Backups Explanation: The Ubuntu Backups app supports encrypted, local, and remote backups and runs in the background.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-079 Question: Which macOS folder contains user-specific preferences, caches, and applicationrelated files? a. /Library b. /System c. /Applications d. /Users/username/Library Correct Answer: d. /Users/username/Library Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: macOS System Folders Explanation: The /Users/username/Library directory contains personal settings and app-related files for that user.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-080 Question: Which Linux component is responsible for managing the boot process and is known as PID1? a. grub b. init c. systemd d. bootmgr Correct Answer: c. systemd Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems

Remediation Heading: OS Components and Common Configuration Files Explanation: systemd is the first process started by the kernel and manages services and the boot process.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-081 Question: What should a user do if their macOS Dock has disappeared from view? a. Hover the pointer near the screen edge. b. Launch Terminal. c. Reboot the system. d. Reinstall macOS. Correct Answer: a. Hover the pointer near the screen edge.

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Navigating the User Interface Explanation: Many users set the Dock to auto-hide; hovering near the edge reveals it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-082 Question: What is the goal of the Zero Trust security model? a. Prevent USB device use. b. Block untrusted websites. c. Treat all users and devices as untrusted by default. d. Limit access to legacy systems only.

Correct Answer: c. Treat all users and devices as untrusted by default.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Logical Security Explanation: The Zero Trust model assumes no implicit trust and verifies all users, devices, and network activity before granting access.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-083 Question: Which term refers to software that disguises itself as a legitimate program to gain unauthorized access? a. Adware b. Trojan c. Botnet d. Cryptojacker Correct Answer: b. Trojan Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.4 Summarize types of malware and tools/methods for detection, removal,

and prevention Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Malware Explanation: A Trojan masquerades as a legitimate application but contains malicious code that compromises the system.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-084 Question: Which type of authentication relies on two or more factors, such as a password and a fingerprint? a. Single sign-on b. Multifactor authentication c. One-time password d. Smart card authentication Correct Answer: b. Multifactor authentication Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Authentication Explanation: Multifactor authentication uses two or more types of credentials—what you know, what you have, or what you are—for enhanced security.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-085 Question: What is the purpose of port security on a corporate switch? a. Disable unused user accounts. b. Limit USB device access. c. Restrict access to only approved MAC addresses. d. Authenticate users to cloud services.

Correct Answer: c. Restrict access to only approved MAC addresses.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Logical Security Explanation: Port security allows only devices with specific MAC addresses to connect, preventing unauthorized access to the network.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-086 Question: Which password policy guideline helps prevent brute-force attacks? a. Set password expiration intervals. b. Use dictionary words for easier recall. c. Avoid storing passwords in documents. d. Use simple keyboard sequences.

Correct Answer: a. Set password expiration intervals.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Given a scenario, configure and apply basic Microsoft Windows OS security settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Login OS Security Options Explanation: Requiring users to update passwords periodically helps reduce the window of vulnerability to brute-force attacks.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-087 Question: Which component in a surge protector absorbs excess voltage during a power spike? a. Resistor b. Capacitor c. MOV (metal oxide varistor) d. TVS diode Correct Answer: c. MOV (metal oxide varistor) Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Surge Protectors Explanation: MOVs are used to absorb voltage spikes and protect connected electronic equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-088 Question: Which AI-related concern describes fabricated or inaccurate outputs that seem plausible? a. Bias b. Plagiarism c. AI hallucination d. Overfitting Correct Answer: c. AI hallucination Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.10 Artificial intelligence (AI) Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Artificial Intelligence (AI) Explanation: AI hallucinations occur when an AI system generates responses that are plausible but factually incorrect or fabricated.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-089 Question: What should a technician do first when arriving to service a user’s workstation? a. Immediately begin troubleshooting. b. Ask to speak to the person responsible for the device. c. Inspect the area for food and drink.

d. Request network credentials.

Correct Answer: b. Ask to speak to the person responsible for the device.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Customer Service Explanation: Technicians should begin with professional introductions and confirm who owns or uses the device before starting work.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-090 Question: Which documentation type is used to log and resolve technical issues in a support environment? a. SLA b. Change log c. Incident documentation d. Asset tag registry Correct Answer: c. Incident documentation Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Documentation and support systems Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Incident Documentation Explanation: Incident documentation is used in help desks and support environments to log and track issues, updates, and resolutions.

202-1201 Test Bank 1 Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-01-001 Question: Which of the following is considered an input device? a. Speaker b. Printer c. Keyboard d. Display Correct Answer: c. Keyboard Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard and Mouse Explanation: A keyboard is a standard input device used to send data to a computer.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-01-002 Question: Which of the following best describes RAM? a. Non-volatile storage b. Firmware chip c. Temporary memory d. Long-term backup Correct Answer: c. Temporary memory Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Memory Explanation: RAM is volatile memory, meaning it loses data when powered off.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-01-003 Question: What is the primary purpose of the power supply in a desktop PC? a. Convert DC to AC b. Process information c. Store data d. Convert AC to DC Correct Answer: d. Convert AC to DC Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Power Supply Explanation: The power supply converts alternating current (AC) from the wall outlet into direct current (DC) used by the computer's internal components.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-01-004 Question: Which component is responsible for connecting and communicating with all internal parts of the PC? a. Hard drive b. Power supply c. Motherboard d. RAM Correct Answer: c. Motherboard Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Motherboard Explanation: The motherboard is the main circuit board that connects and allows communication between all internal computer components.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-01-005 Question: Which of the following should a technician do before opening a computer case? a. Install the drivers b. Connect the power cord c. Remove jewelry and disconnect power d. Adjust display resolution Correct Answer: c. Remove jewelry and disconnect power Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Safety Notes Explanation: To prevent harm to both the technician and the computer, jewelry should be removed and the computer should be powered off and unplugged before servicing.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-02-006 Question: Which USB version supports a maximum data transfer rate of 40 Gb/s? a. USB 3.1 Gen 2 b. USB 3.2 Gen 2 c. USB4 Gen 3 d. Thunderbolt 3 Correct Answer: c. USB4 Gen 3 Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Versions Explanation: USB4 Gen 3 supports data transfer speeds of up to 40 Gb/s using a USB Type-C connector.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-02-007 Question: Which connector is commonly used to connect an analog monitor to a PC? a. HDMI b. DVI-D c. VGA d. DisplayPort Correct Answer: c. VGA Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: VGA Explanation: VGA is a 15-pin analog video connector commonly used for older monitors.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-02-008 Question: Which port uses a reversible 8-pin connector and is proprietary to Apple devices? a. USB Type-C

b. Lightning c. Thunderbolt d. MiniUSB Correct Answer: b. Lightning Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Lightning Explanation: The Lightning port is a proprietary reversible 8-pin connector used on Apple devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-02-009 Question: What is the maximum recommended cable length for Cat 6 Ethernet cables? a. 100 meters b. 165 meters c. 200 meters d. 55 meters Correct Answer: a. 100 meters Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: The standard maximum cable length for Cat 6 Ethernet is 100 meters (328 feet).

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-02-010 Question: Which type of connector is commonly used for fiber-optic cable in home installations? a. RJ45 b. ST c. SC d. MT-RJ Correct Answer: d. MT-RJ Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Fiber Media Explanation: MT-RJ connectors are commonly used in fiber installations for home environments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-03-011 Question: Which of the following components is most responsible for executing instructions and managing data in a computer? a. GPU

b. RAM c. CPU d. Chipset Correct Answer: c. CPU Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Processor Overview Explanation: The CPU (central processing unit) is the core component responsible for executing instructions, performing calculations, and managing I/O operations in a computer.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-03-012 Question: What does an LGA 1200 CPU socket specification indicate? a. The CPU speed b. The size of the cache c. The socket type and number of pins d. The type of cooling required Correct Answer: c. The socket type and number of pins Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: CPU Sockets Explanation: The LGA 1200 specification refers to the type of socket and its 1200 pins, which must match the CPU for compatibility.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-03-013 Question: Which term refers to reducing the processor’s clock frequency to lower heat and save energy? a. Overclocking b. Hyperthreading c. CPU throttling d. CPU caching Correct Answer: c. CPU throttling Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Speeding Up Processor Operations Overview Explanation: CPU throttling reduces the clock speed to prevent overheating and conserve power, especially in mobile devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-03-014 Question: A technician hears beeping sounds during POST and sees a blank screen. What

should be suspected? a. Overheating GPU b. Failing CMOS battery c. CPU or motherboard failure d. Hard drive error Correct Answer: c. CPU or motherboard failure Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Processor Issues Explanation: POST beeps and a blank screen often indicate issues with the CPU or motherboard, especially if other components like power and drives are functioning.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-04-015 Question: What is the most likely cause of a computer losing its date and time settings every time it is powered off? a. BIOS is outdated b. POST has failed c. CMOS battery is failing d. Device driver is missing Correct Answer: c. CMOS battery is failing Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, CPUs, and addon cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Motherboard Battery Explanation: The CMOS battery retains BIOS/UEFI settings such as date and time when the system is powered off. A dead or failing battery can cause this data to reset.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-04-016 Question: Which BIOS/UEFI setting should be modified to allow a system to boot from a USB flash drive with Linux installed? a. TPM b. LoJack c. Secure Boot d. Power Management Correct Answer: c. Secure Boot Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, CPUs, and addon cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Secure Boot Explanation: Secure Boot is a UEFI feature that blocks untrusted operating systems from booting. Disabling Secure Boot allows booting from non-Windows USB drives.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-04-017 Question: What is the first step a technician should take before installing a PCIe USB expansion card? a. Connect the card to a power supply b. Remove the existing USB driver c. Power off the computer and unplug it d. Insert the USB device Correct Answer: c. Power off the computer and unplug it Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, CPUs, and addon cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Installing/Configuring USB Cards Explanation: Safety requires powering off and unplugging the system before installing any internal hardware.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-04-018 Question: Which feature of UEFI makes it more flexible than traditional BIOS? a. Supports fewer security features b. Allows only keyboard-based input c. Includes mouse and internet support d. Requires separate TPM hardware Correct Answer: c. Includes mouse and internet support Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, CPUs, and addon cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: UEFI Explanation: UEFI supports graphical interfaces, mouse use, and internet connectivity for advanced troubleshooting and configuration.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-05-019 Question: What should you always do first before beginning to disassemble a computer? a. Remove the motherboard b. Ground yourself using a wrist strap c. Disconnect all power sources d. Take a photo of the internal components Correct Answer: c. Disconnect all power sources Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Before You Take It Apart Explanation: Disconnecting power is a crucial safety step before disassembly to avoid electrical shock and component damage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-05-020 Question: Which tool is recommended to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge when working inside a computer? a. Multimeter b. Cable tester c. Anti-static wrist strap d. Phillips screwdriver Correct Answer: c. Anti-static wrist strap Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Static Electricity Explanation: An anti-static wrist strap grounds you to prevent ESD from damaging sensitive computer components.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-05-021 Question: What should you do immediately after removing a component during disassembly? a. Test it with a multimeter b. Place it on top of the case c. Log the component’s serial number d. Label and store it properly Correct Answer: d. Label and store it properly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, CPUs, and addon cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Take It Apart Explanation: Properly labeling and storing removed parts helps ensure accurate reassembly and prevents part loss or confusion.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-05-022 Question: What unit is used to measure the power output of a power supply? a. Ohms b. Volts c. Watts d. Amperes Correct Answer: c. Watts Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supplies Explanation: Power supplies are rated in watts, which indicate the total amount of power they can provide to components.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-05-023 Question: A 500-watt power supply is replaced with a 300-watt power supply. What is the most likely result? a. The system will run more efficiently b. The power supply will shut down or cause instability c. The components will draw less power d. Nothing will change if the connectors are correct Correct Answer: b. The power supply will shut down or cause instability Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supplies Explanation: Underpowered supplies may cause reboots, errors, or failure to boot due to insufficient wattage for system demands.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-06-024 Question: What is one key difference between DRAM and SRAM? a. DRAM retains data without refreshing, while SRAM requires constant refreshing. b. SRAM is slower and more affordable than DRAM. c. DRAM is commonly used for cache memory. d. SRAM is faster and used for cache, while DRAM is slower and requires refreshing.

Correct Answer: d. SRAM is faster and used for cache, while DRAM is slower and requires refreshing.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Memory Overview Explanation: SRAM is used for cache due to its speed and does not require refreshing like DRAM, which is slower and needs constant refresh cycles.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-06-025 Question: Which of the following memory module types uses 288 pins and supports the lowest voltage? a. DDR3 b. DDR4 c. DDR5 d. DDR6 Correct Answer: c. DDR5 Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Module Types Explanation: DDR5 uses 288 pins like DDR4 but operates at a lower voltage (1.1V) and provides higher efficiency and bandwidth.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-06-026 Question: Which memory feature allows the BIOS/UEFI to automatically configure voltage and timing for overclocking? a. ECC b. SPD c. XMP d. Dual-rank Correct Answer: c. XMP Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: Extreme Memory Profile (XMP) enables the BIOS/UEFI to set optimal overclocking settings automatically.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-06-027 Question: A technician installs new RAM, but the system beeps on boot and won't start. What should be the first step? a. Replace the hard drive b. Check the memory modules to ensure they are fully seated c. Format the memory using BIOS d. Reset the motherboard jumper Correct Answer: b. Check the memory modules to ensure they are fully seated Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: Improperly seated RAM is a common cause of POST beeps after installation.

Reseating the modules often resolves the issue.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-07-028 Question: Which of the following storage devices combines flash memory with traditional magnetic hard drive technology to improve performance and capacity? a. SSD b. HDD c. SSHD d. NVMe Correct Answer: c. SSHD Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Solid-State Drive (SSD) Overview Explanation: A Solid-State Hybrid Drive (SSHD) combines flash memory and a traditional magnetic hard drive to balance speed and capacity. Frequently accessed data is stored in flash memory for faster performance.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-07-029 Question: Which RAID level uses disk striping without parity to increase performance but offers no fault tolerance? a. RAID 1 b. RAID 5 c. RAID 0 d. RAID 10 Correct Answer: c. RAID 0 Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Fault Tolerance Explanation: RAID 0 improves performance by writing data across multiple drives but lacks redundancy, so data loss will occur if a drive fails.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-07-030 Question: Which interface provides the fastest performance for solid-state drives by utilizing four PCIe lanes? a. SATA III b. USB 3.1 c. NVMe d. SCSI Correct Answer: c. NVMe Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: M.2 and NVMe Explanation: NVMe drives connect via PCIe and offer faster performance compared to traditional SATA-based SSDs. Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-07-031 Question: What is the purpose of the Host Protected Area (HPA) on a hard drive? a. Store user documents securely b. Provide space for RAID caching c. Hold a recovery copy of the operating system d. Increase virtual memory Correct Answer: c. Hold a recovery copy of the operating system Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning Explanation: The HPA is a hidden region used by manufacturers to store a system recovery image or restore utility.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-07-032 Question: Which Windows utility is used to create simple, spanned, and striped volumes?

a. Disk Cleanup b. Device Manager c. Disk Management d. Check Disk Correct Answer: c. Disk Management Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Windows Disk Management Explanation: Disk Management allows technicians to create and manage basic and dynamic volumes, including spanned and striped types.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-08-033 Question: Which display technology uses organic compounds that emit light and does not require a backlight? a. LED b. LCD c. OLED d. CCFL Correct Answer: c. OLED Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Compare and contrast display components and attributes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Video Displays Explanation: OLED displays emit light using organic compounds and do not require a backlight, unlike LCD and LED displays.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-08-034 Question: What is the correct order of steps for installing a video adapter in a desktop PC? a. Power on computer, install card, install drivers b. Remove old drivers, install card, restart c. Power off system, install card, connect display, install drivers d. Download drivers, install card, install power supply Correct Answer: c. Power off system, install card, connect display, install drivers Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Installing a Video Adapter Explanation: The proper installation process includes powering off the system, physically installing the video adapter, connecting the display, and then installing appropriate drivers.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-08-035 Question: Which projector feature is measured in lumens?

a. Display resolution b. Input lag c. Brightness d. Color gamut Correct Answer: c. Brightness Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Compare and contrast display components and attributes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Projector Features Explanation: Brightness or luminance in projectors is measured in lumens, which quantify the light output.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-08-036 Question: A user reports sound distortion when using external speakers. What is the technician's first step? a. Reinstall the operating system b. Replace the speakers c. Move the speakers away from the computer d. Update BIOS firmware Correct Answer: c. Move the speakers away from the computer Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Sound Problems Explanation: Magnetic interference from the computer can cause speaker distortion. Moving the speakers away is a recommended first step.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-08-037 Question: What type of video memory is shared between the video adapter and system RAM? a. GDDR6 b. DDR5 c. Dedicated GPU memory d. Shared system memory Correct Answer: d. Shared system memory Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Video Memory Explanation: Shared system memory refers to system RAM allocated for use by the video adapter when dedicated GPU memory is insufficient.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-09-038 Question: Which type of printer uses tiny heated nozzles to squirt ink onto the paper? a. Laser printer b. Impact printer

c. Thermal printer d. Inkjet printer Correct Answer: d. Inkjet printer Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.8 Given a scenario, perform appropriate printer maintenance.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Inkjet Printers Explanation: Inkjet printers use tiny nozzles to heat and squirt ink onto the paper, allowing for high-quality color output.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-09-039 Question: Which printer component applies heat and pressure to fuse toner to paper? a. Drum b. Cleaning blade c. Fuser assembly d. Transfer belt Correct Answer: c. Fuser assembly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, deploy and configure multifunction devices/printers and settings.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers Explanation: The fuser assembly melts the toner onto the paper using heat and pressure.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-09-040 Question: Which type of printer is most commonly used for multipart forms? a. Laser printer b. Thermal printer c. Impact printer d. 3-D printer Correct Answer: c. Impact printer Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, perform appropriate printer maintenance.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printers Explanation: Impact printers can print on multipart forms using impact paper and ribbons, making them suitable for certain business environments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-09-041 Question: Which of the following should be used to clean a thermal printer’s printhead? a. Compressed air b. Glass cleaner c. Thermal cleaning pen d. Dry cloth Correct Answer: c. Thermal cleaning pen Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware

Exam Subobjective: 3.8 Given a scenario, perform appropriate printer maintenance.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Thermal Printer Maintenance Explanation: A thermal cleaning pen with isopropyl alcohol is recommended for safely cleaning the heating element in a thermal printer.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-09-042 Question: Which print option in Windows allows for two-sided printing? a. Orientation b. Collate c. Quality d. Duplex Correct Answer: d. Duplex Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, perform appropriate printer maintenance.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Printers in the Windows Environment Explanation: The duplex setting allows users to enable or disable two-sided printing in Windows printer settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-10-043 Question: Which of the following mobile devices is most likely to include an IMEI number? a. Laptop b. Smartphone c. Smartwatch d. Tablet with no cellular capability Correct Answer: b. Smartphone Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: IMEI and IMSI Explanation: An IMEI number is a unique identifier assigned to devices that access cellular networks, such as smartphones.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-10-044 Question: What feature allows mobile device users to make secure payments using NFC? a. Bluetooth tethering b. Mobile hotspot c. Contactless payment d. Wi-Fi Direct Correct Answer: c. Contactless payment Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Compare and contrast accessories and connectivity options for mobile devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices

Remediation Heading: Near Field Communication (NFC) Explanation: Contactless payment is enabled by NFC, which allows secure, short-range communication between devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-10-045 Question: Which type of memory is commonly used in mobile devices to store apps and data? a. DIMM b. EEPROM c. eMMC d. DDR4 Correct Answer: c. eMMC Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Storage Explanation: Embedded MultiMediaCard (eMMC) is a common flash storage type used in smartphones and tablets.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-10-046 Question: A user enables biometric authentication on their phone. Which method are they MOST likely using? a. Passcode b. Pattern lock c. Fingerprint scan d. Two-factor SMS code Correct Answer: c. Fingerprint scan Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Given a scenario, monitor mobile device hardware and use appropriate replacement techniques.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Security Explanation: Biometric authentication methods include fingerprint, facial recognition, and retina scans.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-10-047 Question: Which of the following tools can administrators use to manage mobile devices remotely? a. VPN b. MDM c. IMEI d. MFA Correct Answer: b. MDM Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Management (MDM) Explanation: Mobile Device Management (MDM) tools allow IT administrators to monitor, configure, and secure mobile devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-11-048 Question: Which of the following workstation types requires the maximum CPU cores and maximum RAM to run multiple virtual machines effectively? a. Gaming PC b. Thin client c. Virtualization workstation d. Audio/video editing workstation Correct Answer: c. Virtualization workstation Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Virtualization Workstations Explanation: A virtualization workstation must run multiple operating systems, requiring maximum CPU cores, RAM, and large-capacity, fast storage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-11-049 Question: A user reports a burning smell and an unresponsive system. What should the technician do first? a. Replace the power supply b. Run hardware diagnostics c. Open Task Manager d. Unplug the computer immediately Correct Answer: d. Unplug the computer immediately Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Hardware Errors Explanation: A burning smell is a safety hazard. The technician should unplug the system immediately to prevent fire or further damage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-11-050 Question: Which of the following workstation types is most likely to require a RAID array and support for media streaming? a. Thin client b. Home server c. Gaming PC d. Virtualization workstation Correct Answer: b. Home server Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Home Servers Explanation: Home server computers are commonly used for media streaming and file sharing and typically include multiple hard drives in a RAID configuration for data redundancy.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-11-051 Question: Which type of system is most likely to be used in call centers or medical offices to run applications from a central server with minimal local software? a. Gaming PC b. Thick client c. Virtualization workstation d. Thin client Correct Answer: d. Thin client Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Thin Client Workstations Explanation: Thin clients are commonly used in environments where centralization, cost savings, and data security are prioritized.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-11-052 Question: Which component is most critical to review when replacing a high-wattage video card in a CAD workstation? a. Sound card ports b. Optical drive interface c. Power supply wattage and connectors d. Display refresh rate Correct Answer: c. Power supply wattage and connectors Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Power Supply and Case Design Explanation: High-performance GPUs require adequate power and appropriate connector types.

It is essential to verify the power supply can handle the additional load.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-12-053 Question: Which of the following is a key advantage of fiber-optic internet over cable and DSL? a. Requires no modem for connectivity b. Can be installed using existing phone lines c. Immune to electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference d. Shares bandwidth with other local users Correct Answer: c. Immune to electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Compare and contrast internet connection types, network types, and their characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud

Technologies Remediation Heading: Fiber Networks Explanation: Fiber-optic connections use light instead of electricity, making them immune to EMI and RFI. This makes them highly secure and suitable for long-distance, high-bandwidth transmissions.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-12-054 Question: What is a key function of a hypervisor in virtualization environments? a. Encrypts VM data to prevent malware b. Connects containers to public IP addresses c. Manages resource allocation to virtual machines d. Enables secure DNS for virtual desktops Correct Answer: c. Manages resource allocation to virtual machines Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Virtualization Terms Explanation: A hypervisor manages virtual machines and allocates system resources like CPU, RAM, and storage between them.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-12-055 Question: Which of the following internet connection types is least susceptible to interference from weather conditions? a. DSL b. Satellite c. Cable d. Fiber-optic Correct Answer: d. Fiber-optic Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Compare and contrast internet connection types, network types, and their characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Fiber Networks Explanation: Fiber-optic connections use light signals, which are not affected by weather conditions, making them more stable than satellite, DSL, or cable during inclement weather.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-12-056 Question: Which of the following wireless networking technologies is most likely to experience congestion from nearby devices? a. Fiber-optic b. Cellular 5G c. 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi d. Licensed 6 GHz long-range wireless Correct Answer: c. 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Long-Range Fixed Wireless Explanation: The 2.4 GHz band is unlicensed and widely used by many devices, making it prone to interference and congestion.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-12-057 Question: Which of the following describes Desktop as a Service (DaaS)? a. Streaming virtual applications to a mobile device b. Hosting infrastructure hardware such as switches and servers c. Accessing a cloud-hosted desktop managed by a provider d. Installing multiple operating systems on a local desktop Correct Answer: c. Accessing a cloud-hosted desktop managed by a provider Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Summarize cloud computing concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Cloud Services and Models Explanation: DaaS allows users to access a managed desktop environment hosted remotely, removing the need for internal IT teams to handle desktop deployment and maintenance.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-13-058 Question: Which of the following network types is most appropriate for connecting wearable devices to a smartphone? a. LAN b. WAN c. PAN d. MAN Correct Answer: c. PAN Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Compare and contrast internet connection types, network types, and their characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Network Types Explanation: A PAN (Personal Area Network) is designed for short-range communication between personal devices, such as a smartwatch and a smartphone.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-13-059 Question: Which Ethernet standard supports speeds of 10 Gbps over twisted-pair cabling? a. 100Base-T b. 1000Base-T c. 10Base-T d. 10GBase-T Correct Answer: d. 10GBase-T

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.5 Compare and contrast common networking hardware devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Ethernet Standards Explanation: 10GBase-T supports 10 Gbps speeds over twisted-pair cabling such as Cat 6a or better.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-13-060 Question: Which IP address class provides up to 254 usable host addresses per network? a. Class A b. Class B c. Class C d. Class D Correct Answer: c. Class C Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.6 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: IP Addressing Explanation: Class C IP addresses support up to 254 hosts, using a default subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-13-061 Question: Which layer of the OSI model is responsible for routing data between different networks? a. Data Link b. Network c. Transport d. Session Correct Answer: b. Network Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Summarize services provided by networked hosts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: OSI and TCP/IP Models Explanation: The Network layer (Layer 3) is responsible for routing and logical addressing.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-13-062 Question: What device provides centralized cable management and organization in a network rack? a. Switch b. Patch panel c. Router d. Repeater Correct Answer: b. Patch panel Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.5 Compare and contrast common networking hardware devices

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wired Connectivity Explanation: A patch panel connects network cables in a structured and organized way, usually in a rack.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-14-063 Question: What is the primary function of an operating system on a computer? a. Manage only application software b. Display graphical content on a monitor c. Provide the interface between hardware and software d. Handle power supply operations Correct Answer: c. Provide the interface between hardware and software Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Operating Systems Overview Explanation: The OS provides the core interface between user input, application functionality, and hardware components.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-14-064 Question: Which Windows edition includes BitLocker, domain join capability, and Group Policy Editor by default? a. Home b. Pro c. N version d. Core Correct Answer: b. Pro Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Windows 11 Versions Explanation: Windows 11 Pro includes advanced features like BitLocker, domain join, Remote Desktop, and Group Policy Editor.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-14-065 Question: Which of the following is an open-source operating system commonly used for both servers and desktops? a. macOS b. Windows 11 c. Linux d. iPadOS Correct Answer: c. Linux Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware

Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Overview of Popular Operating Systems Explanation: Linux is open-source and free to use or modify, making it popular in many environments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-14-066 Question: What is the maximum amount of RAM supported by a 64-bit version of Windows, depending on the edition? a. 4 GB b. 16 GB c. 128 GB d. 2,048 GB Correct Answer: d. 2,048 GB Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: 32-Bit vs. 64-Bit Operating Systems Explanation: A 64-bit version of Windows can support up to 2,048 GB of RAM, depending on the edition.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-15-067 Question: Which command-line tool can you use to check for and repair file system errors on a hard drive? a. diskpart b. format c. chkdsk /f d. defrag Correct Answer: c. chkdsk /f Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Using Command-Line Tools for Storage Explanation: The chkdsk /f command checks for and repairs file system errors on the drive.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-15-068 Question: Which command-line tool can be used to partition and manage disks in Windows? a. diskpart b. chkdsk c. ping d. attrib Correct Answer: a. diskpart Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware

Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Using Command-Line Tools for Storage Explanation: Diskpart is a powerful tool used to create, delete, and manage disk partitions.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-15-069 Question: Which command would you use to display the IP address of your current system? a. nslookup b. ping c. ipconfig d. tracert Correct Answer: c. ipconfig Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.6 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Basic Network Troubleshooting with Command Line Explanation: The ipconfig command displays IP configuration details, including the system’s IP address.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-15-070 Question: What is the primary function of the ping command? a. Display DNS records b. Test network connectivity c. Reboot the system d. Check disk usage Correct Answer: b. Test network connectivity Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Basic Network Troubleshooting with Command Line Explanation: The ping command sends packets to another system to verify network reachability.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-15-071 Question: Which of the following file systems supports file permissions and encryption on Windows? a. FAT32 b. exFAT c. NTFS d. CDFS Correct Answer: c. NTFS Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting

Remediation Heading: File Systems and Compatibility Explanation: NTFS supports features like file permissions, encryption, and compression.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-16-072 Question: Which Windows feature allows users to encrypt individual files and folders on NTFS volumes? a. BitLocker b. EFS c. TPM d. Secure Boot Correct Answer: b. EFS Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Encrypting and Compressing Explanation: EFS (Encrypting File System) allows users to encrypt files and folders on NTFS volumes, providing security at the file level. BitLocker encrypts the entire drive.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-16-073 Question: Which tool in Windows allows you to view and manage system performance, including CPU and memory usage? a. Event Viewer b. Disk Cleanup c. Task Manager d. Device Manager Correct Answer: c. Task Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Task Manager Explanation: Task Manager is used to view running processes and performance data such as CPU and memory usage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-16-074 Question: What does the Windows feature System Restore do? a. Deletes all user files b. Resets BIOS settings c. Reverts system files to a previous state d. Uninstalls recent updates Correct Answer: c. Reverts system files to a previous state Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows

Remediation Heading: System Restore Explanation: System Restore reverts Windows system files and settings to an earlier point without affecting user data files.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-16-075 Question: Which Windows 11 feature uses virtualization-based security to isolate critical processes? a. UAC b. Smart App Control c. Windows Sandbox d. Core Isolation Correct Answer: d. Core Isolation Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Virtualization-Based Security Explanation: Core Isolation is a Windows 11 feature that uses virtualization-based security to isolate core system processes.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-17-076 Question: Which macOS utility allows you to view current CPU usage, RAM consumption, and disk activity to troubleshoot performance issues? a. Console b. Disk Utility c. System Information d. Activity Monitor Correct Answer: d. Activity Monitor Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Activity Monitor Explanation: Activity Monitor in macOS shows real-time data about system resources, helping troubleshoot performance issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-17-077 Question: Which utility in macOS is used to check the integrity of disks and repair file system errors? a. First Aid in Disk Utility b. System Settings c. Terminal d. Console Correct Answer: a. First Aid in Disk Utility Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Disk Utility Explanation: First Aid in Disk Utility checks for file system issues and attempts to repair them.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-17-078 Question: What macOS feature allows technicians to access a remote Mac to troubleshoot issues? a. Mission Control b. iCloud Drive c. Remote Desktop d. Screen Sharing Correct Answer: d. Screen Sharing Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Screen Sharing Explanation: Screen Sharing lets users or technicians view and control a remote Mac for support purposes.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-17-079 Question: Which built-in macOS tool displays hardware specifications like installed RAM and firmware version? a. System Information b. Activity Monitor c. Console d. System Settings Correct Answer: a. System Information Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: System Information Explanation: System Information provides detailed diagnostics and configuration information about Mac hardware and software.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-17-080 Question: Which command can be used in macOS Terminal to check system uptime and running processes for troubleshooting? a. dd b. ps

c. nano d. grep Correct Answer: b. ps Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Viewing Processes Explanation: The ps command displays currently running processes, aiding in system diagnostics.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-18-081 Question: Which of the following best describes the role of the BIOS/UEFI password? a. It prevents malware from executing in Safe Mode b. It restricts access to a computer’s startup configuration c. It blocks remote desktop access over the network d. It encrypts all user data at rest Correct Answer: b. It restricts access to a computer’s startup configuration Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Using BIOS/UEFI Passwords Explanation: A BIOS/UEFI password is used to prevent unauthorized users from changing lowlevel system settings and accessing the system during boot.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-18-082 Question: Which type of malware pretends to be legitimate software to trick users into installing it? a. Worm b. Spyware c. Trojan horse d. Rootkit Correct Answer: c. Trojan horse Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Understanding Malware Explanation: A Trojan horse disguises itself as a useful or harmless application while actually containing malicious code.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-18-083 Question: Which method best protects data if a device is lost or stolen? a. Disabling Bluetooth b. Installing antivirus software c. Using full disk encryption

d. Running a disk cleanup Correct Answer: c. Using full disk encryption Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Encrypting Data Explanation: Full disk encryption ensures that even if a drive is physically accessed, its data remains unreadable without the proper credentials.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-18-084 Question: What is the primary function of a firewall? a. Encrypt all outgoing emails b. Protect against overheating c. Block unauthorized network access d. Back up critical files to the cloud Correct Answer: c. Block unauthorized network access Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.6 Compare and contrast common networking hardware devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Using Firewalls Explanation: Firewalls act as barriers between trusted internal networks and untrusted external networks, filtering traffic to prevent unauthorized access.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-18-085 Question: A user reports pop-up ads and slow system performance after installing free software.

What type of threat is most likely present? a. Rootkit b. Worm c. Adware d. Keylogger Correct Answer: c. Adware Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Understanding Malware Explanation: Adware often displays unwanted ads and can degrade system performance; it is commonly bundled with freeware.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-19-086 Question: Which type of fire extinguisher is best suited for use on an electrical fire inside a computer? a. Type A b. Type B c. Type C d. Type D

Correct Answer: c. Type C Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Fire Safety Explanation: Type C extinguishers are designed specifically for electrical fires involving energized electronic equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-19-087 Question: Which of the following practices best helps prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage when handling components? a. Wearing latex gloves b. Using a regular vacuum c. Grounding yourself with an ESD strap d. Working in high humidity Correct Answer: c. Grounding yourself with an ESD strap Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Component Handling and Storage Explanation: Using an ESD strap prevents static discharge from damaging sensitive components.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-19-088 Question: What is the safest method for disposing of a swollen lithium-ion battery? a. Throw it in the trash b. Bury it in a sealed container c. Recycle it at a regulated station d. Discharge it before disposal Correct Answer: c. Recycle it at a regulated station Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Electronic Disposal/Recycling Explanation: Swollen lithium-ion batteries pose a fire hazard and must be properly recycled.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-19-089 Question: Which environmental control helps reduce the risk of both overheating and electrostatic discharge (ESD)? a. Low humidity b. Increased ventilation c. Carpeted floors d. Fluorescent lighting Correct Answer: b. Increased ventilation Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Temperature and Humidity Control Explanation: Proper ventilation helps regulate temperature and humidity to protect equipment and reduce ESD. Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-1-19-090 Question: Which of the following should always be included in a help desk ticket for incident documentation? a. Customer’s favorite browser b. Operating system source code c. Device information and problem description d. Internet speed test results Correct Answer: c. Device information and problem description Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Incident Documentation Explanation: Help desk documentation should include detailed and relevant information to support efficient resolution.

202-1201 Test Bank 2 Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-001 Question: Which of the following components are installed into a motherboard expansion slot to add new functionality, such as enhanced graphics or sound? a. Power supply b. Optical drive c. Adapter card d. RAM module Correct Answer: c. Adapter card Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Adapters Explanation: Adapter cards, also known as expansion cards, are inserted into motherboard slots to provide additional features such as improved graphics, sound, or additional ports.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-002 Question: How can a technician determine if a keyboard is working properly? a. Check for software updates b. Open a support ticket c. Press Caps Lock or Num Lock and check for indicator lights d. Replace the device driver Correct Answer: c. Press Caps Lock or Num Lock and check for indicator lights Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard/Mouse Troubleshooting Explanation: Most keyboards have LED lights that toggle when Caps Lock or Num Lock is pressed, indicating functionality.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-003 Question: Which of the following storage devices includes a tray that ejects for inserting discs such as DVDs or CDs? a. Hard drive b. Solid-state drive c. Optical drive d. Flash drive Correct Answer: c. Optical drive Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Basic Computer Hardware Explanation: Optical drives use discs such as CDs, DVDs, or BDs and are equipped with a tray that ejects outward to allow media insertion.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-004 Question: Which of the following is a binary unit equal to 8 bits? a. Nibble b. Byte c. Kilobyte d. Megabyte Correct Answer: b. Byte Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: 1s and 0s Explanation: A byte is made up of 8 bits and is the basic unit of data storage in computing.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-005 Question: What type of connector is used for most modern computer keyboards and mice? a. RJ11

b. PS/2 c. RJ45 d. USB Correct Answer: d. USB Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard and Mouse Explanation: Modern keyboards and mice typically connect via USB ports, offering plug-andplay compatibility.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-006 Question: Which connector uses a screw-on design and is typically used for cable TV? a. BNC b. RJ11 c. F-type d. SC Correct Answer: c. F-type Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Coaxial Explanation: F-type connectors are screw-on coaxial connectors used for cable TV and satellite connections.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-007 Question: What type of USB hub draws power from an external source? a. Bus-powered b. Self-powered c. Passive d. Inline Correct Answer: b. Self-powered Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Hubs Explanation: Self-powered USB hubs use an external power supply to power connected devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-008 Question: Which port on a sound card is typically lime green? a. Line-in b. Microphone

c. Line-out d. S/PDIF Correct Answer: c. Line-out Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Audio Ports Explanation: The lime green port is used for audio line-out to speakers or headphones.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-009 Question: Which wireless technology supports up to 328 feet of range and 128-bit security? a. Infrared b. NFC c. Bluetooth d. Wi-Fi Correct Answer: c. Bluetooth Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot network issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Wireless Connectivity for Input Devices Explanation: Bluetooth can support up to 328 feet (Class 1) and offers 128-bit security.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-010 Question: What is the purpose of using titles like 'Mr.' or 'Dr.' when addressing end users? a. To follow legal naming conventions b. To ensure effective troubleshooting c. To meet soft skill expectations in the workplace d. To avoid support escalation Correct Answer: c. To meet soft skill expectations in the workplace Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot network issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Using Appropriate Titles Explanation: Using professional titles aligns with workplace soft skill expectations and professional communication standards.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-011 Question: Which cache type is built directly into the processor and offers the fastest access? a. L2 cache b. L3 cache c. SSD cache d. L1 cache Correct Answer: d. L1 cache Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware

Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Cache Explanation: L1 cache is integrated into the CPU and is the fastest form of cache memory used for quick access to frequently needed data.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-012 Question: A customer is upgrading their gaming PC. Which processor family offers the most CPU cores for high-end gaming and multitasking? a. Intel Core 3 b. AMD Ryzen 3 c. Intel Core 9 d. AMD Ryzen 5 Correct Answer: c. Intel Core 9 Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Intel Processors Explanation: Intel Core 9 processors have high core counts and are designed for advanced tasks like gaming and content creation.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-013 Question: What should a technician do before installing a heat sink and fan onto a processor? a. Format the hard drive b. Apply thermal paste to the processor c. Change the BIOS settings d. Connect the CPU to the network Correct Answer: b. Apply thermal paste to the processor Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Installing CPU Thermal Solutions Explanation: Thermal paste or a thermal pad must be applied to improve heat transfer between the processor and heat sink.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-014 Question: Which motherboard component helps secure data by storing passwords and encryption keys? a. RAM b. TPM c. PCIe slot

d. GPU Correct Answer: b. TPM Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Motherboard Security Options Explanation: The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) provides hardware-level security functions such as encryption and secure boot validation.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-015 Question: A user reports that USB devices randomly stop working. Which BIOS/UEFI setting might resolve this issue? a. Enable TPM b. Change power state from D3 to D0 c. Disable Secure Boot d. Reset the BIOS to defaults Correct Answer: b. Change power state from D3 to D0 Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting USB Explanation: USB power states are managed through BIOS/UEFI and Device Manager. D3 is a low-power state, and switching to D0 (fully on) can help resolve device connectivity issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-016 Question: Which of the following components enables hardware encryption and is often used with Secure Boot and BitLocker? a. BIOS b. CMOS c. TPM d. ESCD Correct Answer: c. TPM Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: TPM Considerations Explanation: The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) stores cryptographic keys and is essential for Secure Boot, BitLocker, and other hardware-based security measures.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-017 Question: Where in Windows can you view IRQ and memory address assignments for installed devices? a. System Configuration b. Task Manager

c. Device Manager d. BIOS Setup Correct Answer: c. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Using Device Manager to See Resources Explanation: Device Manager provides views such as “Resources by Type,” which shows IRQ, I/O address, DMA channel, and memory address assignments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-018 Question: What should a technician do first when troubleshooting a newly installed NIC that isn't recognized by the system? a. Replace the motherboard b. Install a wireless adapter c. Verify the card is fully seated and check BIOS/UEFI d. Flash the BIOS Correct Answer: c. Verify the card is fully seated and check BIOS/UEFI Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Installing a Network Interface Card Explanation: Improperly seated network cards and disabled onboard ports in BIOS/UEFI are common causes of network card issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-019 Question: A technician installs a new USB bracket and connects it to the motherboard header, but the ports don't function. What is the most likely solution? a. Replace the bracket b. Disable USB permissions c. Enable the USB header in BIOS/UEFI d. Uninstall and reinstall Windows Correct Answer: c. Enable the USB header in BIOS/UEFI Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting USB Explanation: If USB headers on the motherboard are disabled in BIOS/UEFI, USB brackets connected to those headers will not work until they are enabled.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-020 Question: What type of connector supplies power to SATA drives? a. 4-pin Molex b. 15-pin SATA power c. 6-pin PCIe d. 24-pin ATX

Correct Answer: b. 15-pin SATA power Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Connectors Explanation: SATA drives use a distinctive 15-pin power connector, which supports both 3.3V, 5V, and 12V lines.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-021 Question: Which connector is typically used to power the motherboard? a. 4-pin Molex b. 15-pin SATA c. 24-pin ATX d. 6-pin PCIe Correct Answer: c. 24-pin ATX Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Connectors Explanation: The 24-pin ATX connector is the primary motherboard power connector in modern systems.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-022 Question: What should be checked first when a computer does not power on at all? a. Operating system files b. Motherboard capacitors c. Power supply switch and cable d. Peripheral connections Correct Answer: c. Power supply switch and cable Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Problems Explanation: Basic external checks, such as cable connections and the power switch, should be your first troubleshooting step.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-023 Question: What symptom most likely indicates a power supply problem? a. A failed operating system update b. Continuous beeping from the BIOS c. Random shutdowns and restarts d. A corrupted hard drive Correct Answer: c. Random shutdowns and restarts Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Problems Explanation: A failing or underpowered power supply may cause the system to power cycle randomly or fail to start properly.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-024 Question: Why should you take a photo of the inside of a system before disassembly? a. It prevents static electricity buildup b. It makes the process faster c. It ensures correct reassembly d. It identifies software issues Correct Answer: c. It ensures correct reassembly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Before You Take It Apart Explanation: Taking a photo before disassembly helps you remember component placement and cabling when reassembling the system.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-025 Question: In which type of system would ECC memory most likely be used? a. Gaming PC b. Tablet c. Server d. Chromebook Correct Answer: c. Server Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: ECC (Error Correction Code) RAM is typically used in servers to ensure data integrity by detecting and correcting memory errors.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-026 Question: Which of the following memory module characteristics is defined by having a second set of DRAM chips that can be accessed individually? a. Dual-channel b. Registered c. Dual-rank d. ECC Correct Answer: c. Dual-rank Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: Dual-rank memory modules have two sets of DRAM chips, which the system can access one at a time. This differs from dual-channel configurations, which rely on using matched pairs in specific motherboard channels to increase performance.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-027 Question: What does Serial Presence Detect (SPD) provide to the system BIOS/UEFI? a. Application compatibility settings b. Memory error logs c. RAM specifications such as speed and voltage d. Paging file location Correct Answer: c. RAM specifications such as speed and voltage Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: SPD is a chip on the memory module that provides data like capacity, voltage, and timing, which the BIOS uses for configuration.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-028 Question: A user wants to install RAM in dual-channel mode but has one 8 GB and one 4 GB module. What is the result? a. Dual-channeling will be enabled in full b. RAM will operate at the higher module's capacity c. Dual-channeling will operate, but only up to the lowest common capacity d. The system will reject the configuration Correct Answer: c. Dual-channeling will operate, but only up to the lowest common capacity Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning for Memory: Channel Configurations Explanation: Unequal memory sizes can still function in dual-channel mode, but the total dualchannel capacity will be limited by the smaller module.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-029 Question: What happens during the high-level formatting process of a drive? a. Sectors are magnetically encoded b. Operating system is installed c. File system is established and sectors are organized d. Drive is partitioned Correct Answer: c. File system is established and sectors are organized Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: High-Level Formatting

Explanation: High-level formatting sets up a file system (like NTFS or exFAT) and prepares the drive to store data.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-030 Question: Which file system is most suitable for large removable drives that need to store files larger than 4 GB? a. FAT16 b. FAT32 c. NTFS d. exFAT Correct Answer: d. exFAT Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning Explanation: exFAT is designed for flash drives and supports larger files than FAT32, making it ideal for removable storage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-031 Question: What does a “Not Initialized” status in Disk Management indicate about a drive? a. It is ready for formatting b. The drive contains corrupt sectors c. The drive has not been partitioned d. The disk must be initialized before use Correct Answer: d. The disk must be initialized before use Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Disk Management Explanation: A “Not Initialized” status means the disk hasn’t been prepared for use and must be initialized before partitioning or formatting.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-032 Question: Which tool helps diagnose and fix file system errors on a disk in Windows? a. sfc /scannow b. defrag c. diskpart d. chkdsk Correct Answer: d. chkdsk Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Data Loss and Corruption Explanation: The chkdsk command checks the file system and disk surface for errors and repairs them when possible.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-033 Question: Which setting in BIOS/UEFI must be enabled to use advanced features such as hot swapping on SATA drives? a. RAID mode b. IDE mode c. Legacy mode d. AHCI mode Correct Answer: d. AHCI mode Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: System BIOS/UEFI Configuration for Storage Devices Explanation: AHCI mode must be enabled in BIOS/UEFI to support features such as hot swapping and native command queuing for SATA devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-034 Question: Which of the following is a common symptom of a bad projector bulb? a. Display shows the BIOS screen only b. Projector displays a dim or no image c. Multiple monitors stop responding d. Sound does not work through HDMI Correct Answer: b. Projector displays a dim or no image Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.3 Given a scenario, troubleshoot video, projector, and display issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Projector Troubleshooting Explanation: A dim or absent image is often a sign of a failing or burnt-out projector lamp.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-035 Question: Which Windows utility can be used to verify the status of a newly installed sound card? a. Disk Management b. Device Manager c. System Information d. Task Manager Correct Answer: b. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Cards Using Windows Explanation: Device Manager provides information on whether a sound card is properly recognized and functioning in Windows.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-036 Question: What does the lime green audio port typically support on a sound card?

a. Microphone b. Line in c. Line out/front speakers d. Subwoofer Correct Answer: c. Line out/front speakers Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Port Colors Explanation: The lime green audio port is standard for connecting front channel speakers or headphones (line out).

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-037 Question: A technician needs to troubleshoot a touch screen with random swiping issues. What should they check first? a. Sound settings b. Video adapter power c. Digitizer cable connection d. PCIe slot voltage Correct Answer: c. Digitizer cable connection Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Digitizer or Touch Screen Replacement Explanation: A loose or disconnected digitizer cable can cause unresponsive or erratic touch screen behavior.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-038 Question: During the installation of a PCIe video card, the technician notices the card requires more power than the motherboard slot can provide. What should the technician do next? a. Connect a SATA cable from the motherboard b. Connect a 6- or 8-pin PCIe power connector from the power supply c. Disable the onboard video in Windows Device Manager d. Use a USB-to-HDMI adapter instead Correct Answer: b. Connect a 6- or 8-pin PCIe power connector from the power supply Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Video Cards Explanation: Some PCIe video cards require additional power beyond what the PCIe slot provides. These cards must be connected to a 6- or 8-pin PCIe power connector from the power supply to function properly.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-039 Question: What type of printer uses electrostatic charges to transfer toner to the drum? a. Thermal printer b. Laser printer c. Inkjet printer d. Impact printer Correct Answer: b. Laser printer Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, deploy and configure multifunction devices/printers and settings.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers Explanation: Laser printers use a photoconductive drum and electrostatic charges to attract and transfer toner to paper.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-040 Question: Which of the following is a secure way to protect print jobs in a corporate environment? a. Paper tray locking b. Secure Print with PIN entry c. Shared access via USB hub d. Grayscale printing only Correct Answer: b. Secure Print with PIN entry Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, deploy and configure multifunction devices/printers and settings.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Printing/Scanning Data Privacy Explanation: Secure Print requires a PIN for release, ensuring that sensitive printouts are not left unattended.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-041 Question: Which printer issue is most likely caused by a worn pickup roller? a. Faded text b. Paper jam c. Line down page d. No print output Correct Answer: b. Paper jam Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: General Printer Troubleshooting Explanation: Worn pickup rollers can fail to grab paper properly, often causing misfeeds or paper jams.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-042 Question: Which maintenance task should be performed on an impact printer showing horizontal white lines? a. Clean the rollers b. Replace the printhead c. Calibrate the printer d. Refill the ribbon Correct Answer: b. Replace the printhead Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.8 Given a scenario, perform appropriate printer maintenance.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printer Maintenance Explanation: White horizontal lines typically indicate that some pins in the printhead are not firing and require replacement.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-043 Question: Which of the following is an ethical practice when servicing a printer in a user’s office? a. Read leftover printouts to confirm functionality b. Keep all print history for troubleshooting c. Politely ask the user to remove private documents d. Access all printer logs without informing the user Correct Answer: c. Politely ask the user to remove private documents Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Work Ethics Explanation: It is professional and ethical to respect the user's privacy and ask them to remove personal or sensitive documents.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-044 Question: Which configuration is necessary for tethering a mobile device to share its internet connection? a. Airplane mode enabled b. Bluetooth pairing c. Firewall disabled d. Secure boot enabled Correct Answer: b. Bluetooth pairing Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Tethering Explanation: Tethering often uses Bluetooth or USB to share a mobile device's cellular internet connection.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-045 Question: Which mobile technology provides the fastest wireless data speeds over cellular networks? a. 3G b. 4G LTE c. 5G d. WiMAX Correct Answer: c. 5G Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Network Technologies Explanation: 5G offers significantly higher data speeds and lower latency than earlier generations of cellular networks.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-046 Question: What is the purpose of screen calibration on a mobile device? a. Improve screen resolution b. Fix touchscreen responsiveness c. Update display drivers d. Change brightness settings Correct Answer: b. Fix touchscreen responsiveness Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Touchscreen Troubleshooting Explanation: Calibrating the screen ensures the touchscreen accurately registers user input.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-047 Question: A technician performs a factory reset on a smartphone. What is the result? a. All system apps are updated b. All user data is retained c. The device is restored to its original state d. The operating system is upgraded Correct Answer: c. The device is restored to its original state Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Factory Reset Explanation: A factory reset restores the device to its default settings, removing all user data and apps.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-048 Question: Which POST beep code on an AMI BIOS typically indicates a RAM problem? a. 6 short beeps

b. 8 short beeps c. 1 short beep d. 1 long, 2 short beeps Correct Answer: c. 1 short beep Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: POST Codes and Error Messages Explanation: On AMI BIOS, 1 or 2 short beeps usually indicate RAM-related errors.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-049 Question: A user upgraded their SSD, and now the system fails to detect the drive. Which step should the technician take first? a. Replace the SSD b. Change the boot order in UEFI c. Install an additional GPU d. Remove all other storage drives Correct Answer: b. Change the boot order in UEFI Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: The Boot Process Explanation: If the system doesn’t detect the new SSD, one of the first things to check is the boot order in UEFI, especially after hardware changes.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-050 Question: A user complains that their workstation frequently shuts down and restarts randomly.

Which component should the technician check first? a. Optical drive b. Display cable c. RAM seating and power supply output d. Audio subsystem Correct Answer: c. RAM seating and power supply output Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Random Device Failure Explanation: Intermittent shutdowns often stem from loose RAM modules or insufficient power output from the power supply.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-051 Question: Which computer subsystem should be upgraded first to improve video rendering and 3D performance in a CAD workstation? a. RAM b. SSD c. Sound card

d. Video card with GPU Correct Answer: d. Video card with GPU Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Graphic/CAD/CAM Design Workstations Explanation: A high-end video card with a powerful GPU is critical for performance in CAD/CAM and rendering tasks.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-052 Question: What should a technician check first if a VoIP user reports poor call quality and audio dropouts? a. Whether the PC has enough RAM b. If Quality of Service (QoS) is implemented correctly c. Whether the VoIP phone is running antivirus software d. If the ISP supports HTTPS traffic Correct Answer: b. If Quality of Service (QoS) is implemented correctly Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.5 Given a scenario, troubleshoot network issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: VoIP Explanation: QoS prioritizes important traffic like VoIP. If it is not implemented or misconfigured, call quality can degrade due to jitter or latency.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-053 Question: Which cloud deployment model allows multiple unrelated organizations to share infrastructure and development costs? a. Private cloud b. Hybrid cloud c. Community cloud d. Public cloud Correct Answer: c. Community cloud Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Summarize cloud computing concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Cloud Service Deployment Methods Explanation: A community cloud is shared among multiple organizations with common interests or goals, allowing them to share costs and IT infrastructure.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-054

Question: Which type of hypervisor runs directly on the host's hardware, providing better performance and efficiency? a. Type 2 hypervisor b. Emulator c. Container engine d. Type 1 hypervisor Correct Answer: d. Type 1 hypervisor Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Desktop Virtualization Basics Explanation: A Type 1 hypervisor runs directly on the host’s hardware, unlike a Type 2 hypervisor which runs within an operating system. This gives Type 1 hypervisors better performance and lower overhead.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-055 Question: Which statement is true about virtual machines (VMs) and security? a. VMs are immune to malware by default b. Only the host OS needs to be patched c. VM escape can compromise both host and other VMs d. A hypervisor cannot be attacked directly Correct Answer: c. VM escape can compromise both host and other VMs Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Virtualization Security Explanation: VM escape is a serious security risk where an attacker breaches the VM environment and gains access to other VMs and the host system.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-056 Question: Which cloud computing feature allows a business to quickly scale up resources during peak demand and scale down afterward? a. File synchronization b. Multitenancy c. Elasticity d. Metered utilization Correct Answer: c. Elasticity Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Summarize cloud computing concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Cloud Characteristics/Advantages

Explanation: Elasticity allows cloud services to dynamically adjust resource allocation based on real-time demand, supporting efficient scaling.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-057 Question: Which of the following is a characteristic of a mesh network? a. All devices connect through a central access point b. Each device is connected only to a switch c. Devices connect directly to each other d. Devices use coaxial cable exclusively Correct Answer: c. Devices connect directly to each other Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Compare and contrast internet connection types, network types, and their characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Network Topologies Explanation: In a mesh network, devices connect directly to one another for increased redundancy and reliability.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-058 Question: What wireless frequency band is more susceptible to interference from microwave ovens and cordless phones? a. 1.2 GHz b. 2.4 GHz c. 5 GHz d. 900 MHz Correct Answer: b. 2.4 GHz Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless Standards and Interference Explanation: The 2.4 GHz band is commonly affected by interference from household devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-059 Question: Which tool would a technician use to identify a specific cable in a bundle by sending a signal through it? a. Crimper b. Cable tester c. Tone generator and probe d. Multimeter Correct Answer: c. Tone generator and probe Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Explain networking tools and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Networking Tools Explanation: A tone generator and probe allow technicians to trace and identify cables in large bundles.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-060 Question: What is the purpose of Power over Ethernet (PoE)? a. To boost weak network signals b. To connect multiple devices wirelessly c. To send data over fiber optics d. To deliver power and data over the same Ethernet cable Correct Answer: d. To deliver power and data over the same Ethernet cable Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.5 Compare and contrast common networking hardware devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wired Connectivity Explanation: PoE enables both data and electrical power to be transmitted over Ethernet cabling, useful for devices like IP cameras and access points.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-061 Question: Which wireless security protocol offers the strongest encryption for modern networks? a. WEP b. WPA c. WPA2 d. WPA3 Correct Answer: d. WPA3 Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless Security Explanation: WPA3 provides the most robust encryption and security features available for WiFi networks.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-062 Question: Which of the following settings would you access to determine the amount of RAM and Windows version installed? a. Control Panel > Device Manager b. File Explorer > System Tools c. Settings > System > About d. File Explorer > This PC > Network Correct Answer: c. Settings > System > About Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Determining the Windows Version Explanation: The About section in Settings displays system details including RAM, processor, and OS version.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-063 Question: Which Windows file system feature allows file-level encryption on a single folder or file basis? a. BitLocker b. System Restore c. EFS d. File History Correct Answer: c. EFS Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Encrypting File System (EFS) Explanation: EFS (Encrypting File System) allows individual files or folders to be encrypted for added security.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-064 Question: What tool allows technicians to view and modify Windows registry entries? a. System Restore b. msconfig c. Task Manager d. regedit.exe Correct Answer: d. regedit.exe Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Editing the Windows Registry Explanation: The regedit.exe utility is used to view and edit registry entries in Windows.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-065 Question: What is a key reason businesses prefer domains over workgroups for managing user access? a. Workgroups allow better peer-to-peer gaming b. Domains provide centralized authentication and management c. Domains cost less to implement d. Workgroups offer enhanced encryption features Correct Answer: b. Domains provide centralized authentication and management Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Corporate Operating System Needs Explanation: Domains allow centralized control via Active Directory, making management and security easier.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-066 Question: Which command-line utility is used to format a drive with a specific file system? a. ipconfig b. format c. netstat d. sfc Correct Answer: b. format Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Using Command-Line Tools for Storage Explanation: The format command prepares a storage device with a file system such as NTFS or FAT32.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-067 Question: Which tool would you use to assign a network drive letter to a shared folder? a. diskpart b. net use c. chkdsk d. format Correct Answer: b. net use Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.4 Explain common network configuration concepts.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Drive Mapping in Networking Explanation: net use maps network drives by assigning drive letters to shared folders.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-068 Question: Which command shows the path packets take to reach a destination IP address? a. nslookup b. tracert c. ping d. ipconfig Correct Answer: b. tracert Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Basic Network Troubleshooting with Command Line Explanation: tracert shows the route taken by packets to reach a specific IP address or domain.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-069 Question: Which of the following utilities can resolve a domain name to an IP address? a. ping b. nslookup

c. tracert d. netstat Correct Answer: b. nslookup Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: DNS Troubleshooting with Command Line Explanation: nslookup queries DNS servers to resolve domain names to IP addresses.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-070 Question: Which command-line utility can show current TCP/IP connections and listening ports? a. netstat b. ipconfig c. tracert d. ping Correct Answer: a. netstat Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Analyzing Network Connections Explanation: netstat displays network connections and port activity on the system.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-071 Question: Which of the following tools would you use to create and manage virtual machines in Windows 11 Pro? a. Hyper-V Manager b. System Configuration c. Services d. Task Scheduler Correct Answer: a. Hyper-V Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Using Hyper-V Explanation: Hyper-V Manager enables users to create and manage virtual machines on supported Windows editions like Windows 11 Pro. Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-072 Question: Which feature allows users to run a temporary virtualized Windows environment for testing? a. BitLocker b. Windows Sandbox c. System Restore

d. Secure Boot Correct Answer: b. Windows Sandbox Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Using Sandbox Explanation: Windows Sandbox provides a lightweight, isolated environment to safely test applications or settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-073 Question: Which of the following best describes the purpose of Windows Update? a. To install software from the Microsoft Store b. To monitor running services c. To keep Windows secure and up to date d. To schedule system backups Correct Answer: c. To keep Windows secure and up to date Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Windows Update Explanation: Windows Update automatically downloads and installs updates to maintain system stability and security.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-074 Question: What is the purpose of UAC (User Account Control) in Windows? a. To prevent unauthorized software installations b. To manage device drivers c. To back up system files d. To create new user accounts Correct Answer: a. To prevent unauthorized software installations Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: User Account Control Explanation: UAC helps prevent unauthorized changes to the operating system by prompting for confirmation or administrator credentials.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-075 Question: Which setting in Task Manager allows you to view background processes and resource usage? a. Services tab b. Users tab c. Performance tab d. Processes tab

Correct Answer: d. Processes tab Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Task Manager Explanation: The Processes tab in Task Manager displays all running apps and background processes, including CPU, memory, and disk usage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-076 Question: In macOS, which utility allows users to perform secure erase operations and manage partitions? a. Activity Monitor b. Disk Utility c. Time Machine d. Terminal Correct Answer: b. Disk Utility Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Disk Utility Explanation: Disk Utility provides disk formatting, partitioning, and secure erase options in macOS.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-077 Question: Which macOS feature creates full and incremental backups automatically on an external drive? a. Keychain Access b. App Store c. Console d. Time Machine Correct Answer: d. Time Machine Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Time Machine Explanation: Time Machine is macOS's built-in backup solution that supports full and incremental backups.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-078 Question: Which command in macOS or Linux is used to change the ownership of a file? a. chmod

b. grep c. chown d. su Correct Answer: c. chown Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Terminal Explanation: The chown command changes file ownership and requires superuser privileges in most cases.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-079 Question: Which macOS troubleshooting mode starts the computer with minimal system processes and checks the disk? a. Safe Mode b. Recovery Mode c. Verbose Mode d. Target Disk Mode Correct Answer: a. Safe Mode Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Safe Mode Explanation: Safe Mode starts macOS with limited processes and performs a disk check to help resolve issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-080 Question: Which utility should a technician use in macOS to view application and system log files? a. Disk Utility b. Force Quit c. Console d. System Information Correct Answer: c. Console Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Console Explanation: Console is used to view logs from macOS and installed applications, helping identify the cause of issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-081 Question: Which authentication method combines something you know with something you have? a. Password only b. Biometric scan only c. Multifactor authentication d. Security questions Correct Answer: c. Multifactor authentication Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Using Authentication and Authorization Explanation: Multifactor authentication increases security by requiring credentials from two or more categories, like a password (something you know) and a smartphone (something you have).

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-082 Question: Which of the following would best help defend against phishing attacks? a. Full disk encryption b. Employee training c. Network load balancing d. Physical locks on devices Correct Answer: b. Employee training Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Understanding Social Engineering Explanation: Phishing relies on tricking users; training helps them recognize suspicious emails and avoid clicking malicious links.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-083 Question: Which term describes a targeted social engineering attack that appears to come from a trusted source? a. Spoofing b. Spear phishing c. Spam d. Zero-day attack Correct Answer: b. Spear phishing Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Understanding Social Engineering Explanation: Spear phishing targets specific individuals by using personal details to create believable, malicious messages.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-084 Question: Which of the following hardware features must be enabled to support secure boot and

drive encryption in modern systems? a. ECC b. TPM c. UAC d. NFC Correct Answer: b. TPM Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Encrypting Data / Securing Devices Explanation: The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a hardware chip used to securely store encryption keys, enabling technologies such as full disk encryption and secure boot. The BIOS/UEFI firmware must have TPM enabled for these features to work.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-085 Question: Which wireless security protocol offers the highest level of protection for a home network? a. WEP b. WPA c. WPA2 d. WPA3 Correct Answer: d. WPA3 Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Securing Wireless Networks Explanation: WPA3 is the most current and secure wireless encryption standard, offering stronger protection than WPA2, WPA, or WEP. Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-086 Question: Which documentation would be most useful for tracking the physical location and technical details of a company’s laptops? a. Network topology diagram b. Asset management system c. Service-level agreement d. Knowledge base Correct Answer: b. Asset management system Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Summarize services provided by networked hosts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Asset Management Explanation: Asset management helps maintain hardware records and track device assignments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-087 Question: What is the purpose of a maintenance window in a change management plan? a. To prevent any new changes b. To test software backups c. To implement planned changes with minimal disruption d. To archive help desk tickets Correct Answer: c. To implement planned changes with minimal disruption Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Change Management Explanation: Maintenance windows reduce impact on users by scheduling changes during lowusage times.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-088 Question: What is a potential danger of handling spilled toner without proper equipment? a. Overheating the printer b. Tripping over cables c. Respiratory irritation d. Overcharging the battery Correct Answer: c. Respiratory irritation Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Toner Safety and Disposal Explanation: Toner dust can irritate the respiratory system if inhaled; use PPE when cleaning spills.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-089 Question: A technician receives an angry call from a customer. What is the best first step? a. Interrupt and explain the problem b. Stay silent and wait them out c. Tell them to calm down d. Listen attentively and acknowledge the frustration Correct Answer: d. Listen attentively and acknowledge the frustration Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Dealing with a Difficult Customer or Situation Explanation: Professionalism requires listening actively and validating the customer’s concerns.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-090 Question: Which power protection device offers the best protection against both surges and brownouts? a. Line conditioner b. Surge suppressor

c. Power strip d. Extension cord Correct Answer: a. Line conditioner Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Line Conditioners Explanation: Line conditioners provide clean, stable power by correcting overvoltage and undervoltage conditions.

202-1202 TEST BANK 1 Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-001 Question: Which actions best demonstrate active listening when helping a frustrated user? a. Asking clarifying questions after the user finishes speaking. b. Avoiding eye contact to focus on documentation. c. Interrupting to offer a quick solution. d. Multitasking by checking phone notifications during the conversation.

Correct Answer: a. Asking clarifying questions after the user finishes speaking.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Active listening includes asking clarifying questions to better understand a customer’s issue and shows the user that they are being heard.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-002 Question: A technician is preparing to install an adapter card. Which of the following safety precautions should be performed first? a. Power on the PC to test the display. b. Connect all internal power cables. c. Disconnect the computer from its power source. d. Remove the device driver.

Correct Answer: c. Disconnect the computer from its power source Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Safety Notes Explanation: Disconnecting the computer from the power source is a fundamental safety step before any hardware installation or maintenance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-003 Question: What is one way a technician can display a positive attitude when interacting with a user? a. Assume all users have the same level of technical knowledge. b. Treat every issue, no matter how small, as important. c. Offer a resolution to the problem as quickly as possible. d. Engage in conversation and smile often to put the user at ease.

Correct Answer: b. Treat every issue, no matter how small, as important.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Demonstrating a positive attitude means treating every user concern seriously and respectfully, regardless of the issue’s perceived importance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-004 Question: When lifting a heavy laser printer in a repair area, which of the following is the best safety practice? a. Twist your torso to save time. b. Keep your legs straight and lift with your back. c. Ask for help or use lifting equipment if needed. d. Hold the object far away from your body.

Correct Answer: c. Ask for help or use lifting equipment if needed.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Safety Notes Explanation: Using proper lifting techniques or assistance helps prevent injury—especially when handling heavy IT equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-01-005 Question: What is a recommended method for maintaining professionalism during a support interaction? a. Nodding and making eye contact while taking notes b. Avoiding questions to speed up the resolution c. Letting the customer vent without acknowledging their frustration d. Speaking over the user to demonstrate knowledge Correct Answer: a. Nodding and making eye contact while taking notes Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Professionalism includes active listening techniques such as eye contact, taking notes, and showing engagement with the user’s concerns.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-006 Question: Which of the following USB versions supports the highest power delivery, up to 240 watts? a. USB 3.0 b. USB 3.2 Gen 2 c. USB 4 with PD d. USB 2.0 Correct Answer: c. USB 4 with PD Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Power Delivery (USB-PD) Explanation: USB 4 with Power Delivery (PD) supports power levels up to 240 watts, significantly more than earlier versions.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-007 Question: What is the primary advantage of using plenum cable in building air-circulation spaces? a. Enhanced fire resistance b. Higher data transmission speed c. Lower cost than PVC d. Easier to install than STP Correct Answer: a. Enhanced fire resistance Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: Plenum cable is treated with fire-retardant materials and produces less smoke and toxic fumes, making it safer for use in air ducts.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-008 Question: Which type of video connector supports both analog and digital signals? a. HDMI b. DVI-D c. DisplayPort d. DVI-I Correct Answer: d. DVI-I

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Digital Visual Interface (DVI) Explanation: DVI-I connectors support both analog and digital signals, making them more versatile than DVI-D. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-02-009 Question: A technician needs to connect a legacy serial device to a modern PC with only USB ports. What should they use? a. USB-C to HDMI adapter b. DB25 to RJ45 adapter c. USB-to-serial converter d. USB hub with mini-USB Correct Answer: c. USB-to-serial converter Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Modem and Serial Ports Explanation: A USB-to-serial converter allows modern computers to communicate with older devices using DB9/RS-232 serial connections.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-03-010 Question: Which of the following best defines the concept of active listening for a technician? a. Focusing on what the customer is saying and responding appropriately b. Listening quietly without responding or interacting c. Asking the customer repeated questions until they give a helpful answer d. Writing down technical terms to help explain the issue Correct Answer: a. Focusing on what the customer is saying and responding appropriately Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Active listening involves attentively focusing on the customer's words, confirming understanding, and responding in a supportive, non-confrontational manner.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-03-011 Question: Which behavior is discouraged when practicing active listening with a customer? a. Taking notes b. Summarizing the customer’s concern

c. Using technical jargon d. Nodding occasionally Correct Answer: c. Using technical jargon Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Avoiding technical jargon helps reduce customer anxiety and promotes clearer communication.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-03-012 Question: What is the main benefit of active listening for the technician? a. It reduces the time required to complete documentation. b. It improves understanding of the customer’s problem. c. It increases sales of replacement parts. d. It minimizes the need for customer follow-up.

Correct Answer: b. It improves understanding of the customer’s problem.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Active listening helps the technician gather accurate information, leading to faster and more effective problem resolution.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-013 Question: Which BIOS/UEFI feature ensures that only trusted software is allowed to boot by verifying the digital signature of boot loaders and drivers? a. TPM b. Secure Boot c. BIOS Password d. Drive Encryption Correct Answer: b. Secure Boot Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Given a scenario, configure and apply basic Microsoft Windows OS security settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Secure Boot Explanation: Secure Boot is a BIOS/UEFI feature that validates digital signatures to prevent unauthorized OS or malware from booting.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-014 Question: What should a technician do before flashing the BIOS/UEFI firmware to prevent data loss? a. Back up CMOS settings and current BIOS. b. Replace the CMOS battery. c. Disable TPM. d. Enable Secure Boot.

Correct Answer: a. Back up CMOS settings and current BIOS. Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.3 Given a scenario, implement workstation backup and recovery methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Flash BIOS Explanation: Backing up the CMOS settings and current BIOS ensures you can recover configuration data if the upgrade fails.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-015 Question: What is the risk of clearing the TPM module during system configuration? a. Increased boot times b. Invalidation of encryption keys c. Loss of device drivers d. Overclocking resets Correct Answer: b. Invalidation of encryption keys Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Compare and contrast common data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: TPM Considerations Explanation: Clearing TPM deletes security keys, potentially causing data loss on encrypted drives.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-016 Question: Which feature in Device Manager allows technicians to view and analyze IRQ conflicts? a. Devices by Connection b. Resources by Type c. Driver Details d. Power Management Tab Correct Answer: b. Resources by Type Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Using Device Manager to See Resources Explanation: The "Resources by Type" view shows IRQs and helps identify potential conflicts between devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-04-017 Question: Which visual indicator in Device Manager suggests a device may have a resource conflict or driver issue? a. Red X b. Down arrow c. Yellow exclamation mark d. Blue information icon Correct Answer: c. Yellow exclamation mark Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Configurations Explanation: A yellow exclamation mark indicates a resource conflict or driver problem for that device.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-018 Question: Which safety measure should a technician follow when working inside a computer to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD)? a. Use an antistatic wrist strap grounded to the case. b. Use a magnetic screwdriver. c. Wear latex gloves. d. Work with the computer powered on.

Correct Answer: a. Use an antistatic wrist strap grounded to the case.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Explanation: An antistatic wrist strap keeps the technician and the equipment at the same voltage potential, preventing ESD damage.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-019 Question: What should a technician always do before opening a computer case for preventive maintenance? a. Use compressed air to clean the vents. b. Disconnect and label internal cables. c. Unplug the computer and wear safety goggles. d. Run a disk defragmentation utility.

Correct Answer: c. Unplug the computer and wear safety goggles.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance

Explanation: Power must be disconnected, and safety equipment should be used to avoid injury or component damage during maintenance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-020 Question: Which of the following is an environmentally responsible way to dispose of old electronics? a. Use a certified e-waste recycling program. b. Store indefinitely in a warehouse. c. Recycle using municipal trash collection. d. Place in general office recycling bins.

Correct Answer: a. Use a certified e-waste recycling program.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.5 Summarize environmental impacts and local environment controls Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Certified e-waste recycling programs follow appropriate disposal protocols for electronics containing toxic materials.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-021 Question: What is a recommended way to clean dust from inside a computer during preventive maintenance? a. Use a household vacuum with metal attachments. b. Use compressed air after vacuuming with a nonmetallic tool. c. Spray isopropyl alcohol directly on the components. d. Submerge parts in warm soapy water.

Correct Answer: b. Use compressed air after vacuuming with a nonmetallic tool.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.5 Summarize environmental impacts and local environment controls Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Vacuuming first with a nonmetallic attachment, followed by compressed air, helps remove dust safely and efficiently.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-05-022 Question: What is the best way to handle front panel cables when disassembling or reassembling a computer? a. Pull them gently if they resist. b. Memorize their labels and pin directions. c. Document locations and align connectors carefully. d. Leave them attached to the motherboard.

Correct Answer: c. Document locations and align connectors carefully.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Step 3. Remove Internal Cables and Connectors Explanation: Front panel cables must be correctly oriented and reattached to the right pins to avoid errors during reassembly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-023 Question: What is the purpose of virtual memory in Windows? a. It uses hard drive space as if it were RAM. b. It stores firmware instructions for system startup. c. It encrypts memory modules during boot. d. It improves CPU clock speed for memory-intensive tasks.

Correct Answer: a. It uses hard drive space as if it were RAM. Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Virtual RAM Explanation: Virtual memory uses hard drive space as RAM when physical memory is full, enabling multitasking and large applications to run efficiently.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-024 Question: Which Windows tool allows you to monitor memory usage with real-time graphs? a. System Restore b. Task Manager c. BIOS Setup d. Control Panel Correct Answer: b. Task Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Monitoring Memory Usage in Windows Explanation: Task Manager's Performance tab displays real-time CPU and memory usage, helping users identify memory-related issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-025 Question: A technician is troubleshooting a customer's PC that freezes randomly. Which Windows diagnostic tool should they use to check for memory issues? a. Check Disk b. Event Viewer c. System File Checker d. Windows Memory Diagnostic Correct Answer: d. Windows Memory Diagnostic

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: The Windows Memory Diagnostic tool checks RAM for errors that could cause freezing, crashes, or sluggish performance.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-026 Question: What happens if a paging file is placed on the same partition as the operating system? a. It increases application load speeds. b. It prevents hibernation. c. It can cause slower performance. d. It disables error logging.

Correct Answer: c. It can cause slower performance.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: For optimal performance, the paging file should be placed on a separate, fast drive, not on the OS partition.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-06-027 Question: A user installs new RAM and receives a POST error message. What is the most likely cause? a. Malware infection b. Incorrect RAM seating or type c. Expired BIOS firmware d. Incompatible graphics driver Correct Answer: b. Incorrect RAM seating or type Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: POST errors after a RAM upgrade often indicate improper seating or incompatible memory modules.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-028 Question: Which of the following best describes the purpose of the NTFS file system? a. To provide file compression and security features b. To enable fast formatting only c. To limit file sizes to 4 GB d. To allow only one partition per disk Correct Answer: a. To provide file compression and security features

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning Explanation: NTFS supports file compression and encryption, and is designed for high-capacity disks.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-029 Question: Which RAID level provides fault tolerance by mirroring data across two drives? a. RAID 0 b. RAID 1 c. RAID 5 d. RAID 6 Correct Answer: b. RAID 1 Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Fault Tolerance Explanation: RAID 1 duplicates data across two drives, providing redundancy in case of a drive failure.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-030 Question: Which command is used in Windows to check for file system errors and fix them? a. sfc /scannow b. convert c. diskpart d. chkdsk /f Correct Answer: d. chkdsk /f Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Storage Devices Overview Explanation: The 'chkdsk /f' command scans for and fixes file system errors.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-031 Question: Which Windows tool allows for managing partitions and formatting disks? a. Task Manager b. Disk Management c. Event Viewer d. System Configuration Correct Answer: b. Disk Management

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Windows Disk Management Explanation: Disk Management is used to create, delete, and format partitions and assign drive letters.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-07-032 Question: Which file system is most suitable for removable flash drives requiring large file support? a. FAT16 b. FAT32 c. NTFS d. exFAT Correct Answer: d. exFAT Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning Explanation: exFAT is optimized for flash drives and supports very large file sizes.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-033 Question: Which Windows setting allows a user to calibrate a touch screen after replacing it? a. System > Sound b. Device Manager > HID c. Calibrate Display Color d. Control Panel > Power Options Correct Answer: c. Calibrate Display Color Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Digitizer or Touch Screen Replacement Explanation: Windows allows touch screen calibration through the “Calibrate Display Color” utility, useful after replacing or adjusting a digitizer.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-034 Question: Which Windows feature lets you verify whether a newly installed sound card is recognized by the system? a. Disk Management b. Device Manager c. Task Manager d. Services Console

Correct Answer: b. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Cards Using Windows Explanation: Device Manager displays whether hardware devices like sound cards are properly recognized and if drivers are installed.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-035 Question: A customer reports poor video performance after a display driver update. Which setting should the technician use to revert to the previous driver? a. Task Scheduler b. System Configuration c. Roll Back Driver d. System Restore Correct Answer: c. Roll Back Driver Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Video Explanation: The Roll Back Driver option in Device Manager allows technicians to revert to a previous version of a driver if a newer one causes issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-08-036 Question: Which Windows diagnostic tool can be used to view memory and video card information? a. dxdiag b. sfc c. msconfig d. devmgmt Correct Answer: a. dxdiag Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Video Memory Explanation: The dxdiag tool provides detailed information about the video adapter, video memory, and display settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-037 Question: Which of the following printer types uses a photosensitive drum and a fusing assembly to bond toner to paper? a. Laser printer b. Thermal printer

c. Inkjet printer d. Impact printer Correct Answer: a. Laser printer Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers Explanation: Laser printers use a multi-step process that includes transferring toner from a drum to paper and fusing it with heat and pressure.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-038 Question: Which printer type is most appropriate for printing multipart forms using carbon or carbonless paper? a. Thermal printer b. Laser printer c. Inkjet printer d. Impact printer Correct Answer: d. Impact printer Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printers Explanation: Impact printers, like dot matrix, physically strike the paper and are ideal for printing on multipart or continuous forms.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-039 Question: Which component in a laser printer is responsible for cleaning leftover toner from the drum? a. Transfer roller b. Fuser c. Cleaning blade d. Primary corona Correct Answer: c. Cleaning blade Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers Explanation: The cleaning blade removes any residual toner from the drum after printing to prepare it for the next job.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-040 Question: A customer complains that the printed output from their inkjet printer is smudging. What is the most likely cause? a. Low toner level b. Faulty fuser assembly c. Paper is too thick d. Ink has not dried properly Correct Answer: d. Ink has not dried properly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Inkjet Printers Explanation: Inkjet prints can smear if the ink does not dry completely or if low-quality paper is used.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-09-041 Question: Which print option allows you to save a document to a file format that cannot be easily edited but is viewable on most devices? a. Print to XPS b. Print to PDF c. Print to image d. Print to file Correct Answer: b. Print to PDF Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.10 Given a scenario, install applications according to requirements Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Virtual Printing Explanation: "Print to PDF" saves documents in a widely compatible, secure format suitable for sharing and archiving.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-042 Question: Which of the following actions helps protect personal data shared with mobile apps? a. Disable Airplane Mode. b. Turn off app notifications. c. Remove unnecessary app permissions. d. Use a physical keyboard.

Correct Answer: c. Remove unnecessary app permissions.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile OS and application security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features

Explanation: Mobile apps may request access to personal data. You can protect your data by removing unnecessary app permissions in the device’s privacy settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-043 Question: A technician is configuring a customer’s home router and wants to restrict access to only authorized wireless devices. Which setting should be enabled? a. Bluetooth pairing b. MAC address filtering c. NFC scanning d. GPS tracking Correct Answer: b. MAC address filtering Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.10 Given a scenario, apply security settings on SOHO wireless and wired networks Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Wi-Fi Analyzer Explanation: MAC address filtering is a SOHO wireless security method that limits network access to specified device MAC addresses.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-044 Question: Why is personal appearance important for IT professionals who troubleshoot mobile devices? a. It encourages others to be more professional. b. It helps build user trust and confidence. c. It encourages users to help resolve issues. d. It leads to faster resolution of issues.

Correct Answer: b. It helps build user trust and confidence.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Overview Explanation: A professional appearance helps establish credibility and trust with clients, which is critical in technical support roles.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-045 Question: Which mobile OS feature allows users to zoom in on a screen using two fingers? a. Pinch open b. Swipe c. Long touch d. Tap and hold Correct Answer: a. Pinch open Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems

Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Interacting with a Mobile Operating System Explanation: The pinch open gesture, or spreading two fingers apart, zooms in on mobile screens, helping users access details more clearly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-10-046 Question: What does GPS geotracking allow apps or services to do? a. Enable Airplane Mode. b. Track a device’s physical location. c. Improve multitouch responsiveness. d. Block all wireless communication.

Correct Answer: b. Track a device’s physical location.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features Explanation: Geotracking uses GPS to monitor a device’s movement and location, which some apps use to enhance service or functionality.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-047 Question: Which component is most important for a virtualization workstation running multiple virtual machines? a. High-definition sound card b. Dual monitors c. Maximum CPU cores and RAM d. Gaming GPU Correct Answer: c. Maximum CPU cores and RAM Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.9 Given a scenario, use remote access technologies.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Virtualization Workstations Explanation: Virtualization workstations require the highest possible CPU and memory resources to efficiently run multiple virtual machines.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-048 Question: What is the primary purpose of POST in the boot process? a. Launches the operating system b. Checks the power supply's wattage c. Tests and verifies hardware before booting d. Starts up user applications Correct Answer: c. Tests and verifies hardware before booting Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting

Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: The Boot Process Explanation: POST (Power-On Self-Test) checks for essential hardware functionality before the system boots into the OS. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-049 Question: Which of the following workstation types benefits most from high-end GPUs and maximum video RAM? a. Thin client b. Gaming PC c. Standard thick client d. Home server Correct Answer: b. Gaming PC Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Given a scenario, implement best practices associated with documentation and support systems information management.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Gaming PCs Explanation: Gaming PCs are built for performance and rely on advanced GPUs with large video RAM for graphics rendering.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-050 Question: Which is a best practice during Step 1 of the troubleshooting process? a. Reboot the system. b. Question the user and re-create the issue. c. Replace components. d. Format the drive.

Correct Answer: b. Question the user and re-create the issue.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Step 1. Identify the Problem Explanation: Gathering information from the user and recreating the problem are key elements in identifying the issue.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-11-051 Question: What does a single POST beep typically indicate? a. Successful hardware check b. RAM issue c. CPU failure d. Hard disk failure

Correct Answer: a. Successful hardware check Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: POST Codes and Error Messages Explanation: A single POST beep often signals that all hardware tests passed and no issues were detected.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-052 Question: Which browser feature verifies the authenticity of a website using HTTPS and a valid digital certificate? a. Ad blocker b. Certificate viewer c. Pop-up blocker d. Private browsing Correct Answer: b. Certificate viewer Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Security certificate verification Explanation: The certificate viewer lets users inspect HTTPS certificates to verify site authenticity and trust status.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-053 Question: What is the primary purpose of private browsing (Incognito/InPrivate) mode in modern browsers? a. It prevents tracking by antivirus software. b. It blocks all pop-ups and redirects. c. It does not store cookies, history, or temporary files. d. It disables HTTPS. Correct Answer: c. It does not store cookies, history, or temporary files.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Common web browser configuration settings Explanation: Private browsing prevents data from being saved locally, enhancing privacy.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-054 Question: Which browser issue may result from a rogue HOSTS file or redirection malware? a. Tab loading slowly b. Browser auto-sync disabled c. Homepage repeatedly changes to an unknown site d. Autofill suggestions fail

Correct Answer: c. Homepage repeatedly changes to an unknown site Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Basic Web Browser Issues Explanation: Redirect malware modifies browser behavior, such as changing the homepage or search engine.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-055 Question: What setting allows you to remove cookies, saved passwords, and browsing history in Microsoft Edge? a. Site isolation b. Privacy Sandbox c. Clear browsing data d. Reset browser Correct Answer: c. Clear browsing data Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Common web browser configuration settings Explanation: “Clear browsing data” allows users to remove saved private data for better privacy and troubleshooting.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-12-056 Question: A technician suspects a browser extension is causing pop-ups. What is the first step to confirm the cause? a. Reinstall the operating system. b. Reset the browser to factory settings. c. Disable all extensions and enable them one by one. d. Delete the HOSTS file.

Correct Answer: c. Disable all extensions and enable them one by one.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Degraded Browser Performance Explanation: The best approach is to isolate the issue by disabling all extensions and then enabling them individually.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-057 Question: Which Windows network type should you choose when connected to a public Wi-Fi hotspot to maximize security?

a. Workgroup b. Domain c. Private d. Public Correct Answer: d. Public Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.7 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows networking features on a client/desktop Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Windows network options Explanation: Public networks are used when connecting to unknown or untrusted networks. This setting disables device discovery and sharing, enhancing security.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-058 Question: What feature in Microsoft Windows helps users determine the appropriate security settings based on their current network connection? a. Network Profile b. Internet Explorer Settings c. Network Adapter Tool d. DHCP Scope Correct Answer: a. Network Profile Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.7 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows networking features on a client/desktop Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Windows network options Explanation: Windows uses network profiles to define the security and sharing behavior of a network, such as public or private.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-059 Question: A technician needs to verify the IPv6 address of a PC. Which command-line tool should they use? a. ping b. ipconfig c. netstat d. nslookup Correct Answer: b. ipconfig Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: IPv6 link-local address and IPv4 address

Explanation: The ipconfig command displays IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, as well as subnet mask and default gateway information.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-060 Question: What is the primary purpose of assigning a subnet mask in a TCP/IP configuration? a. To provide data encryption for transmission b. To define gateway routing paths c. To determine the network and host portions of an IP address d. To reserve addresses for DHCP Correct Answer: c. To determine the network and host portions of an IP address Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Subnet masks Explanation: A subnet mask identifies which part of the IP address corresponds to the network and which part identifies the host.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-13-061 Question: Which of the following provides basic encryption and authentication for a wireless network and is now considered insecure? a. WPA3 b. WPA2 c. WPA d. WEP Correct Answer: d. WEP Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Compare and contrast wireless security protocols and authentication methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless network standards Explanation: WEP is an outdated security protocol for wireless networks and is no longer considered secure due to its vulnerabilities.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-062 Question: Which of the following is an open-source operating system that allows anyone to modify its code without permission? a. Linux b. Windows 11 c. macOS d. Chrome OS Correct Answer: a. Linux Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Overview of Popular Operating Systems Explanation: Linux is an open source OS developed collaboratively, allowing users to freely modify and distribute its code. macOS and Windows are proprietary, and Chrome OS is also limited to Google-managed hardware.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-063 Question: Which Windows edition is designed for high-end workloads and supports up to 6 TB of RAM and 4 CPUs? a. Windows 11 Home b. Windows 11 Enterprise c. Windows 11 Pro Education d. Windows 11 Pro for Workstations Correct Answer: d. Windows 11 Pro for Workstations Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Compare and contrast basic features of Microsoft Windows editions Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Windows 11 Versions Explanation: Windows 11 Pro for Workstations is intended for data-intensive users and supports advanced hardware configurations, including 6 TB of RAM and multiple CPUs. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-064 Question: Which of the following would most likely cause an OS upgrade to fail due to a missing manufacturer update? a. Incompatible GUI b. Misconfigured registry key c. Outdated driver d. Excessive RAM Correct Answer: c. Outdated driver Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Update Limitations Explanation: Outdated drivers may not be compatible with the new OS, leading to setup errors or hardware malfunctions during upgrades.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-065 Question: Which feature allows technicians to quickly view and manage multiple open windows or create virtual desktops in Windows 11? a. Registry Editor b. Task View c. File Explorer d. Disk Management

Correct Answer: b. Task View Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Task View Explanation: Task View lets users see all open apps in a visual layout and supports the creation of multiple desktops for organizing workflows.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-14-066 Question: Which of the following Windows 11 utilities provides encryption for individual files and folders? a. TPM b. BitLocker c. Encrypting File System (EFS) d. Credential Manager Correct Answer: c. Encrypting File System (EFS) Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Encrypting File System (EFS) Explanation: EFS encrypts specific files or folders, unlike BitLocker, which encrypts entire drives. It is only available in Pro, Enterprise, and Education editions.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-067 Question: Which command is used to create a new directory from the command prompt? a. cd b. md c. rd d. dir Correct Answer: b. md Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The md or mkdir Command Explanation: The md or mkdir command is used to make a new directory from the current location shown in the prompt.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-068 Question: What command displays a list of files and directories from your current directory in the command prompt? a. list

b. show c. path d. dir Correct Answer: d. dir Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The dir Command Explanation: The dir command lists the files and directories at the current command prompt location.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-069 Question: Which command is used to display the contents of a text file at the command prompt? a. read b. open c. type d. list Correct Answer: c. type Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The type Command Explanation: The type command displays the contents of a file such as a .txt file directly in the command-line window.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-15-070 Question: What is the purpose of the attrib +h command? a. Show file size. b. Delete hidden files. c. Make a file hidden. d. Compress a file.

Correct Answer: c. Make a file hidden.

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The attrib Command Explanation: The attrib +h command assigns the hidden attribute to a file, making it invisible in standard directory listings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-071 Question: Which Windows utility allows you to view and manage hardware drivers, roll back drivers, and troubleshoot hardware conflicts? a. Task Manager

b. System Configuration c. Services d. Device Manager Correct Answer: d. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, Use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Device Manager Explanation: Device Manager is a key tool in Windows for viewing installed devices, updating or rolling back drivers, and resolving hardware issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-072 Question: Which type of Windows installation allows user files and settings to be preserved while updating to a new OS version? a. Clean install b. Repair installation c. In-place upgrade d. Image deployment Correct Answer: c. In-place upgrade Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Given a scenario,Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: In-Place Upgrade or Clean Install Explanation: An in-place upgrade keeps user data and configuration while updating to a newer version of Windows.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-073 Question: Which Windows feature allows you to restore the operating system to a previous configuration without affecting user data files? a. Recovery partition b. System Restore c. Safe Mode d. Device Manager Correct Answer: b. System Restore Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting

Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: System Restore Explanation: System Restore creates restore points to revert system files and settings to an earlier state, helping resolve issues caused by recent changes.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-074 Question: Which file system is best suited for large hard drives and supports features like file permissions, compression, and journaling? a. FAT32 b. exFAT c. ReFS d. NTFS Correct Answer: d. NTFS Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: File System Types Explanation: NTFS is the preferred file system for Windows installations due to its support for large volumes and advanced features like security and compression.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-16-075 Question: Which command can convert a FAT32 partition to NTFS without data loss? a. format /fs:ntfs b. diskpart convert c. convert x: /fs:ntfs d. chkdsk /f Correct Answer: c. convert x: /fs:ntfs Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Planning Drive Space Explanation: The convert command can be used to convert FAT16 or FAT32 file systems to NTFS without losing existing data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-076 Question: Which macOS feature provides a grid-based view of all installed applications and allows users to launch apps directly?

a. Spotlight b. Finder c. Dock d. Launchpad Correct Answer: d. Launchpad Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Navigating the User Interface Explanation: Launchpad is a grid-based application launcher in macOS that displays all installed apps and allows users to launch them directly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-077 Question: Which macOS utility allows users to perform full and incremental system backups and navigate through past backups in a timeline interface? a. Disk Utility b. iCloud c. Time Machine d. Activity Monitor Correct Answer: c. Time Machine Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Time Machine Explanation: Time Machine is the built-in macOS backup utility that supports full and incremental backups with a user-friendly timeline interface.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-078 Question: What is the name of the default file manager in Ubuntu Linux? a. Finder b. Nautilus c. Terminal d. Dash Correct Answer: b. Nautilus Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Navigating the User Interface

Explanation: Nautilus is the default file manager in Ubuntu Linux and is used for browsing files and directories.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-079 Question: Which of the following commands is used in macOS to stop a non-responding application from the command line? a. halt b. rm c. kill d. sudo Correct Answer: c. kill Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Force Quit Explanation: The kill command in Terminal allows users to stop a process by providing its process ID. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-17-080 Question: What macOS utility provides detailed information about system hardware, software, and network configurations? a. Disk Utility b. Console c. System Information d. Activity Monitor Correct Answer: c. System Information Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: System Information Explanation: System Information provides an overview of Mac hardware, software, and network settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-081 Question: Which policy element in a company’s security policy defines who can access specific parts of a building and how access is logged? a. Password policy b. Acceptable use policy c. Physical access d. Regulatory compliance Correct Answer: c. Physical access

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Security Policy Explanation: Physical access policies define who may enter certain building areas, how entry is granted (e.g., badges, keys), and how access is logged for auditing.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-082 Question: What is the main security benefit of using electronic key cards instead of metal keys? a. They prevent tailgating. b. They support biometric authentication. c. They are easier to reprogram and manage. d. They require a password for access.

Correct Answer: c. They are easier to reprogram and manage.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Physical Security Explanation: Electronic key cards can be issued or revoked quickly without changing locks, making them easier to manage than metal keys.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-083 Question: Which device is used to prevent shoulder surfing in shared workspaces? a. Cable lock b. Privacy screen c. Motion sensor d. RFID tag Correct Answer: b. Privacy screen Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.1 Summarize various security measures and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Physical Security Explanation: Privacy screens limit screen visibility to users directly in front of the monitor, preventing nearby individuals from viewing sensitive data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-084 Question: Which method ensures secure access to corporate resources over an untrusted network? a. Secure Boot b. VPN c. ACL d. Port security Correct Answer: b. VPN

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Logical Security Explanation: A VPN creates an encrypted connection over an untrusted network (like the internet), securing remote access to corporate data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-18-085 Question: Which malware type poses a threat by encrypting data and demanding payment to restore access? a. Keylogger b. Rootkit c. Trojan d. Ransomware Correct Answer: d. Ransomware Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.4 Summarize types of malware and tools/methods for detection, removal, and prevention Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Malware Explanation: Ransomware encrypts files or systems and requires the victim to pay to regain access, often in cryptocurrency.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-086 Question: Which type of fire extinguisher is specifically designed for electrical fires in IT environments? a. Type A b. Type B c. Type C d. Type D Correct Answer: c. Type C Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Fire Safety Explanation: Type C fire extinguishers are made specifically for electrical fires and are safe to use on IT equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-087 Question: Which of the following should be avoided when cleaning spilled laser printer toner? a. Using a HEPA-filtered vacuum b. Wearing nitrile gloves

c. Using a regular vacuum cleaner d. Wearing a dust mask Correct Answer: c. Using a regular vacuum cleaner Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Toner Safety and Disposal Explanation: Regular vacuums can become damaged or cause toner to melt inside the motor; a HEPA vacuum is recommended.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-088 Question: What type of documentation typically includes information like hardware serial numbers and assigned users? a. Knowledge base b. Service-level agreement c. Asset management record d. Network topology diagram Correct Answer: c. Asset management record Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Documentation and support systems Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Asset Management Explanation: Asset management systems track details like serial numbers, model information, assigned users, and licensing.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-089 Question: What is the term for the documented timeframe in which planned IT changes are executed? a. Emergency change b. Freeze period c. Change window d. Maintenance window Correct Answer: d. Maintenance window Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Change management procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Change Management Explanation: A maintenance window is a predefined time frame for executing planned changes such as upgrades or patches.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-1-19-090 Question: Which method is recommended to safely dispose of a swollen lithium-ion battery? a. Place it in a standard trash bin.

b. Recycle it at a regulated station. c. Submerge it in water and discard it. d. Throw it in an electronics recycling bin without a bag.

Correct Answer: b. Recycle it at a regulated station.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Electronic Disposal/Recycling Explanation: Swollen or damaged Li-ion batteries must be taken to regulated recycling stations due to the risk of fire or explosion.

202-1202 TEST BANK 2 Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-001 Question: What is the first step in safely installing an internal adapter card? a. Reconnect the power cord. b. Load the device driver. c. Follow manufacturer instructions and wear an antistatic strap. d. Power on the system.

Correct Answer: c. Follow manufacturer instructions and wear an antistatic strap.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: How to identify an adapter’s function Explanation: Before touching internal components, technicians should use ESD protection like an antistatic strap and follow documented procedures.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-002 Question: A user spills coffee on their keyboard. What is the technician’s best immediate response? a. Unplug the keyboard and turn it upside down. b. Plug in the keyboard to test it. c. Tell the user to dry the keys with a towel. d. Use a hair dryer to remove the moisture.

Correct Answer: a. Unplug the keyboard and turn it upside down.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard/Mouse Troubleshooting Explanation: To prevent electrical damage, unplugging and turning over the keyboard is the safest and most effective initial response.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-003 Question: A technician listens to a user describe a printer issue. Which action demonstrates poor communication skills? a. Suggesting a solution as the user is explaining the issue b. Asking open-ended follow-up questions c. Asking for clarity and repeating the user’s concern d. Making eye contact and taking notes Correct Answer: a. Suggesting a solution as the user is explaining the issue Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities Explanation: Interrupting a user breaks the flow of communication and shows a lack of respect and patience—both essential in technical support roles.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-004 Question: Which of the following is a best practice for safely cleaning an optical mouse? a. Use water and soap on the sensor. b. Spray cleaning fluid directly onto the mouse. c. Wipe the bottom with a damp cloth and use compressed air. d. Soak the mouse in alcohol for 5 minutes.

Correct Answer: c. Wipe the bottom with a damp cloth and use compressed air.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Mouse and Keyboard Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Proper cleaning involves using lint-free cloths and compressed air, which are safe and effective on optical sensors.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-01-005 Question: Why is it important to avoid tunnel vision when troubleshooting computer issues? a. It helps consider all possible causes of a problem. b. It ensures better performance tuning. c. It improves your typing accuracy. d. It saves time by focusing on only one possible fix.

Correct Answer: a. It helps consider all possible causes of a problem.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Technician Qualities

Explanation: Avoiding tunnel vision allows technicians to stay open to multiple potential causes, leading to more effective problem-solving.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-006 Question: What is the purpose of the tang on an Ethernet cable's RJ45 connector? a. It ensures waterproofing for outdoor use. b. It allows the connector to lock securely into a port. c. It transmits PoE signals. d. It prevents crosstalk between twisted pairs.

Correct Answer: b. It allows the connector to lock securely into a port.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: The tang on an RJ45 connector clicks into place to secure the Ethernet cable in the port and must be pressed down to release it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-007 Question: Which port type allows charging even when the computer is powered off? a. USB 2.0 b. USB-C c. Sleep-and-charge USB d. eSATAp Correct Answer: c. Sleep-and-charge USB Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Hubs Explanation: Sleep-and-charge USB ports continue to deliver power for charging devices even when the host computer is shut down.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-008 Question: Which connector is most likely to be used with a fiber-optic cable for long-distance backbone communication? a. LC b. DB9 c. RJ11 d. F-type Correct Answer: a. LC Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and

professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Fiber Media Explanation: LC (Lucent Connector) is commonly used in fiber-optic networking, especially for long-distance, high-speed backbone infrastructure.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-02-009 Question: Which statement best describes the function of a punchdown tool? a. It secures HDMI cables to video cards. b. It crimps RJ45 connectors onto UTP cables. c. It connects network wires to a patch panel. d. It fastens USB-C ports onto motherboards.

Correct Answer: c. It connects network wires to a patch panel.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Ethernet Cable Explanation: A punchdown tool pushes individual wires into terminals on a patch panel or keystone jack, ensuring a secure and permanent connection.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-03-010 Question: A technician is speaking with a frustrated user. What is the most appropriate first step in active listening? a. Begin testing hardware immediately. b. Review the system logs. c. Ask the user to reboot the system. d. Let the user explain the issue without interruption.

Correct Answer: d. Let the user explain the issue without interruption.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Allowing the customer to fully explain the issue without interruption is a foundational element of active listening.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-03-011 Question: Which of the following contributes most to a negative customer experience during a service call? a. Asking follow-up questions b. Using a warm and caring tone c. Speaking in acronyms and technical terms

d. Confirming the issue before troubleshooting Correct Answer: c. Speaking in acronyms and technical terms Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Using technical jargon can confuse or alienate customers and should be avoided in favor of plain, clear language.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-03-012 Question: How should a technician respond when unsure about a customer's description of a problem? a. Immediately begin fixing what they think is wrong. b. Argue with the customer to clarify. c. Restate the customer’s concern to confirm understanding. d. Ask the customer to call back later.

Correct Answer: c. Restate the customer’s concern to confirm understanding.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Active Listening Explanation: Summarizing and confirming the customer’s statements ensures mutual understanding and supports accurate troubleshooting.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-013 Question: What is a key best practice when troubleshooting hardware configuration issues? a. Reset CMOS before each test. b. Change all components simultaneously. c. Test multiple solutions at once. d. Change only one thing at a time and document.

Correct Answer: d. Change only one thing at a time and document.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Given a scenario, implement best practices associated with documentation and support systems information management Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: A Good Technician practice Explanation: Changing only one variable at a time allows accurate identification of the root cause and simplifies documentation.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-014 Question: Which Device Manager status symbol indicates that a device has been disabled?

a. Yellow exclamation mark b. Blue question mark c. Gray X d. Down arrow Correct Answer: d. Down arrow Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Configurations Explanation: A down arrow in Device Manager means the device is disabled but not necessarily malfunctioning.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-015 Question: Which setting in BIOS/UEFI must be enabled to use virtualization features in Windows? a. Secure Boot b. TPM c. ACPI d. Virtualization Technology Correct Answer: d. Virtualization Technology Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Given a scenario, perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: BIOS/UEFI Configuration Settings Explanation: Virtualization Technology must be enabled in BIOS/UEFI for hypervisors to access hardware features.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-016 Question: If a technician installs a USB device before its required driver, what problem might occur? a. Device fails to work properly b. BIOS lockout c. USB power surge d. Hard drive corruption Correct Answer: a. Device fails to work properly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile OS and application issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Installing a USB Device Explanation: Installing a USB device before its driver may result in misconfiguration or failure to operate correctly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-04-017 Question: What is the purpose of flashing the BIOS/UEFI? a. Reset CMOS settings. b. Install a new operating system. c. Update firmware for improved hardware support. d. Change boot device priority.

Correct Answer: c. Update firmware for improved hardware support.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.3 Given a scenario, implement workstation backup and recovery methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Flashing/Clearing the BIOS/UEFI Explanation: Flashing BIOS/UEFI updates the firmware to fix bugs, enhance security, or support new hardware.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-018 Question: Why should technicians avoid using magnetic screwdrivers inside a computer? a. They void manufacturer warranties. b. They can damage sensitive components like memory. c. They corrode metal parts. d. They cause short circuits in CPUs. Correct Answer: b. They can damage sensitive components like memory.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Tools Explanation: Magnetic screwdrivers can disrupt memory modules or leave magnetic fields that may affect sensitive parts.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-019 Question: Which behavior demonstrates professionalism when documenting a repair? a. Recording clear, complete, and timely notes b. Delaying updates until the next shift c. Writing brief notes using slang and abbreviations d. Avoiding written documentation to save time Correct Answer: a. Recording clear, complete, and timely notes Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Written Communication Skills Explanation: Accurate and timely documentation helps future technicians and reflects well on professional conduct.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-020 Question: According to professional email etiquette, what should a technician avoid? a. Using a subject line b. Writing while angry c. Typing too fast d. Sending too many follow-up emails Correct Answer: b. Writing while angry Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Written Communication Skills Explanation: Writing while angry can result in unprofessional messages. It is best to wait and respond calmly.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-021 Question: What is the most appropriate way to transport unused adapters during a disassembly? a. Stack them on top of each other. b. Wrap them in paper towels. c. Place them in ESD-safe bags. d. Store them loosely in a toolbox.

Correct Answer: c. Place them in ESD-safe bags.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Disassembly Explanation: ESD-safe bags protect components from static damage while in storage or transport.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-05-022 Question: Which tool is specifically designed to remove dust from tight spots without generating static? a. Toner vacuum b. Urethane swab c. Diagonal cutter d. Antistatic brush Correct Answer: d. Antistatic brush Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.5 Summarize environmental impacts and local environment controls Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Preventive Maintenance Explanation: Antistatic brushes are used to remove dust from tight areas without generating static electricity.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-023 Question: In Task Manager’s Memory Composition view, what does the “Standby” section represent? a. Memory used by the BIOS b. Memory that is currently being written to disk c. Cached memory not actively used d. Reserved memory for video processing Correct Answer: c. Cached memory not actively used Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Monitoring Memory Usage in Windows Explanation: The Standby section shows cached memory that is available but not currently in active use.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-024 Question: Why should a technician use the Compatibility tab in Windows properties for an older application? a. To run the app as if on an older Windows version b. To select a different network adapter c. To assign administrative privileges d. To optimize memory allocation Correct Answer: a. To run the app as if on an older Windows version Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Older Applications in Windows Explanation: Compatibility mode allows legacy applications to run in newer Windows environments by simulating older OS settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-025 Question: A technician adds new RAM, but the system does not boot. What is the best first troubleshooting step? a. Update the GPU firmware. b. Reseat the memory module. c. Reinstall the operating system. d. Disable virtualization in BIOS. Correct Answer: b. Reseat the memory module.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting Memory Problems Explanation: If the system fails to boot after a RAM upgrade, the memory module may not be fully seated in the slot.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-026 Question: Which field in Task Manager shows how much physical memory is currently available for use? a. Paged Pool b. Cached c. Available d. In Use Correct Answer: c. Available Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Monitoring Memory Usage in Windows Explanation: The "Available" field displays the amount of memory ready for use by apps and services.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-06-027 Question: What is a recommended action before physically installing RAM into a desktop system? a. Run Windows Memory Diagnostic. b. Disable firewall settings. c. Connect the PC to a surge protector. d. Disconnect power and use ESD protection.

Correct Answer: d. Disconnect power and use ESD protection.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Removing/Installing Memory Explanation: To prevent damage to components, always power down and follow proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling memory.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-028 Question: Which key combination can be used to restart a PC into recovery mode if the pagefile is corrupted? a. Shift + Restart b. Alt + F4 c. Ctrl + Shift + Esc d. Ctrl + Alt + Del Correct Answer: a. Shift + Restart

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Virtual Memory Explanation: Holding Shift while clicking Restart enters the Windows Recovery Environment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-029 Question: Which of the following features allows dynamic expansion of storage using multiple drives in Windows? a. RAID 0 b. Storage Spaces c. NTFS d. Disk Cleanup Correct Answer: b. Storage Spaces Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Windows Storage Spaces Explanation: Windows Storage Spaces allow users to pool multiple disks and configure them for performance or redundancy.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-030 Question: Which Windows utility is used to locate and replace corrupted system files? a. sfc /scannow b. convert /fs:ntfs c. diskpart d. msconfig Correct Answer: a. sfc /scannow Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Data Loss and Corruption Explanation: The 'sfc /scannow' command scans and restores corrupted system files.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-031 Question: What should a technician check first if a newly installed SSD is not recognized by the system? a. File system format b. Motherboard chipset temperature c. Proper seating in the connector d. Cloud sync settings Correct Answer: c. Proper seating in the connector

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting New Storage Device Installation Explanation: Improper seating of an SSD in its connector can prevent BIOS/UEFI from detecting it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-07-032 Question: Which tool can a technician use to analyze disk fragmentation on a Windows system? a. Disk Management b. Task Manager c. Disk Cleanup d. Defragment and Optimize Drives Correct Answer: d. Defragment and Optimize Drives Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Dealing with Slow Performance Explanation: Defragment and Optimize Drives helps improve mechanical hard drive performance by reorganizing fragmented files.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-033 Question: Which trait reflects a proactive and professional IT technician attitude when resolving customer concerns? a. Preserving company reputation b. Waiting for management before responding to a user c. Seeking solutions instead of making excuses d. Focusing solely on the technical problem Correct Answer: c. Seeking solutions instead of making excuses Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Attitude Explanation: A professional technician is proactive and solutions-oriented, communicating positively even during technical challenges.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-034 Question: A user reports no sound from their speakers. The technician checks the Windows taskbar and sees an “x” over the sound icon. What should be checked first? a. HDMI port b. System BIOS c. Device Manager d. Muted volume setting

Correct Answer: d. Muted volume setting Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Cards Using Windows Explanation: A muted sound icon on the taskbar indicates the volume is muted; this is one of the first troubleshooting steps.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-035 Question: Which of the following actions best demonstrates professionalism when a customer becomes frustrated about display issues? a. Blaming the manufacturer’s hardware b. Raising your voice to establish authority c. Reassuring the customer and explaining the next steps d. Pointing out that the customer caused the issue Correct Answer: c. Reassuring the customer and explaining the next steps Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Attitude Explanation: Maintaining professionalism and guiding the customer through the troubleshooting process helps ease tension and builds trust.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-036 Question: After replacing a digitizer, which Windows tool helps confirm that the device is functioning and properly connected? a. System Configuration b. Services Console c. Reliability Monitor d. Device Manager Correct Answer: d. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Digitizer or Touch Screen Replacement Explanation: Device Manager allows you to verify that hardware, such as digitizers, is correctly installed and recognized.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-08-037 Question: What should a technician do if a projector is connected but displays nothing and the customer is visibly annoyed? a. Continue working until the issue is resolved.

b. Politely explain how the customer misused the projector. c. Politely explain that you are checking the input source. d. Replace the projector immediately.

Correct Answer: c. Politely explain that you are checking the input source.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Projector Troubleshooting Explanation: The correct professional response includes calmly informing the user about your troubleshooting steps, such as verifying the projector’s input source.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-038 Question: Which feature must be enabled to allow other computers on a network to print to a shared USB printer on a Windows workstation? a. File and Printer Sharing b. Printer Spooling c. Network Discovery d. Remote Assistance Correct Answer: a. File and Printer Sharing Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.7 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows networking features on a client/desktop Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Printer Sharing Explanation: File and Printer Sharing must be enabled in Windows settings to allow network access to shared printers.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-039 Question: What does a duplexing assembly enable a printer to do? a. Print wirelessly b. Print to PDF c. Print on both sides of the paper d. Use high-capacity paper trays Correct Answer: c. Print on both sides of the paper Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Paper Explanation: A duplexing assembly allows a printer to automatically print on both sides of a page.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-040 Question: Which of the following is a safety precaution when replacing a toner cartridge in a laser

printer? a. Shake the toner cartridge to mix the toner. b. Wear a dust mask to avoid inhaling toner. c. Keep the cartridge in direct sunlight. d. Use compressed air to blow out loose toner.

Correct Answer: b. Wear a dust mask to avoid inhaling toner.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Given a scenario, use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Refilling Cartridges, Re-inking Ribbons, and Recycling Cartridges Explanation: Toner is a fine powder and can be harmful if inhaled, so a dust mask is recommended when handling it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-041 Question: Which of the following is a common cause of a faint printout from an impact printer? a. Worn-out ribbon b. Misaligned roller c. Dirty paper d. Bad print driver Correct Answer: a. Worn-out ribbon Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printer Maintenance Explanation: A fading or faint printout on an impact printer typically indicates the need for ribbon replacement.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-09-042 Question: In a thermal printer, what is a likely cause of missing or faded print areas? a. Empty ink cartridge b. Dirty heating element c. Low toner d. Misaligned drum Correct Answer: b. Dirty heating element Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Thermal Printer Maintenance Explanation: Thermal printers use a heating element to print; if it is dirty, parts of the image may not appear.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-043 Question: An Android user reports that an app crashes every time it is opened. What is the technician's first troubleshooting step? a. Remove the SIM card b. Perform a factory reset c. Restart the device d. Disable Wi-Fi Correct Answer: c. Restart the device Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile OS and application issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features Explanation: Restarting a mobile device can resolve many application issues by clearing temporary memory and app conflicts.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-044 Question: What is the most secure way to dispose of a mobile device that contained sensitive company data? a. Recycle it with a certified vendor. b. Donate it to a school. c. Sell it online. d. Give it to another employee.

Correct Answer: a. Recycle it with a certified vendor.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.9 Compare and contrast common data destruction and disposal methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Device Management Explanation: A certified e-waste recycler ensures proper data destruction and environmentally safe disposal.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-045 Question: A technician is helping a user enable fingerprint authentication on an Android phone.

Which security setting is the technician configuring? a. Encryption b. Biometric authentication c. Application permissions d. Hotspot tethering Correct Answer: b. Biometric authentication Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Given a scenario, configure and apply basic Microsoft Windows OS security settings

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Common Apps and Features Explanation: Fingerprint authentication is a biometric method that enhances device security through physical traits.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-046 Question: Which action should a technician recommend to improve mobile device security when installing apps? a. Install apps from third-party websites. b. Use airplane mode during installation. c. Install apps only from trusted app stores. d. Avoid using a lock screen.

Correct Answer: c. Install apps only from trusted app stores.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, apply common methods for securing mobile devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Obtaining, Installing, and Removing Apps Explanation: Trusted app stores screen apps for malware and other security risks, making them safer than unknown sources.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-10-047 Question: Which mobile OS is based on the Linux kernel and is most commonly used on smartphones? a. Windows b. Android c. Chrome OS d. iOS Correct Answer: b. Android Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Mobile Operating System Basics and Features Explanation: Android is an open-source operating system based on the Linux kernel and is the most widely used mobile OS. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-048 Question: What component is typically not found in a thin client? a. Local storage b. Network adapter c. Display d. Keyboard Correct Answer: a. Local storage Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures

Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Thin Client Workstations Explanation: Thin clients rely on network-based resources and usually lack significant local storage.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-049 Question: Which type of error is typically indicated by a BIOS POST beep code of three beeps? a. CPU failure b. Video card issue c. Battery failure d. Motherboard or chipset error Correct Answer: d. Motherboard or chipset error Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: POST Codes and Error Messages Explanation: Three POST beeps in many systems (like Dell) indicate an issue with the motherboard or chipset.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-050 Question: Which of the following is a proper step when dealing with a difficult customer? a. Correct their misunderstanding. b. Remain quiet to avoid escalation. c. Stay calm and use assertive communication. d. Escalate the issue immediately without attempting resolution.

Correct Answer: c. Stay calm and use assertive communication.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Given a scenario, use proper communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Dealing with Difficult Customers Explanation: Assertive but respectful communication helps manage challenging interactions while maintaining professionalism.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-051 Question: Which system type benefits most from surround sound and large hard drives? a. Audio/video editing workstation b. Thin client c. NAS d. Virtualization workstation Correct Answer: a. Audio/video editing workstation Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures

Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Audio/Video Editing Workstations Explanation: These systems require high-performance storage and audio subsystems for editing and playback.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-11-052 Question: Which of the following is part of Step 6 in the troubleshooting process? a. Implementing the solution b. Replacing defective hardware c. Documenting actions taken d. Rebooting the system Correct Answer: c. Documenting actions taken Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Step 6. Document the Findings, Actions, and Outcomes Explanation: Documenting what was done ensures future techs and the customer understand the issue and solution.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-053 Question: What tool within Google Chrome provides process-level control over running browser components? a. Chrome Config Manager b. Task Manager c. Troubleshoot Mode d. Secure DNS Correct Answer: b. Task Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Browser troubleshooting tools Explanation: Chrome’s built-in Task Manager helps identify and end processes causing performance issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-054 Question: Which of the following browser settings helps prevent DNS hijacking by encrypting web address lookups? a. Secure DNS b. Private browsing c. Safe mode d. Proxy settings

Correct Answer: a. Secure DNS Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.11 Given a scenario, configure relevant security settings in a browser Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Secure DNS Explanation: Secure DNS encrypts DNS queries to prevent manipulation and improve privacy.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-055 Question: Which of the following is a legitimate remediation step if a browser redirect issue persists after clearing history and resetting settings? a. Enable JavaScript. b. Boot into Safe Mode with Networking. c. Delete bookmarks. d. Turn off antivirus.

Correct Answer: b. Boot into Safe Mode with Networking.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Basic Web Browser Issues Explanation: Safe Mode with Networking can help determine if a third-party add-on or malware is interfering with browser operation.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-056 Question: What should a technician check first if a user complains that all websites are loading slowly in their browser, but other applications run fine? a. Clear OS logs. b. Reset firewall rules. c. Restart DHCP services. d. Check browser extensions.

Correct Answer: d. Check browser extensions.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Degraded Browser Performance Explanation: Slow browser performance can result from misbehaving or excessive extensions.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-12-057 Question: Which of the following helps reduce browser performance issues and removes temporary web data? a. Disable Java. b. Run a full OS restore.

c. Clear cache. d. Format the local disk.

Correct Answer: c. Clear cache.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Degraded Browser Performance Explanation: Clearing the browser cache can help resolve display and speed issues caused by corrupted or outdated data.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-058 Question: Which wireless standard supports operation in the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz frequency bands and is designed for efficient multi-device use? a. 802.11ac b. 802.11g c. 802.11ax d. 802.11n Correct Answer: c. 802.11ax Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Compare and contrast wireless security protocols and authentication methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless network standards Explanation: 802.11ax (Wi-Fi 6 and 6E) operates in the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz bands and supports multiple simultaneous data streams.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-059 Question: In a SOHO wireless network, what is the role of hiding the SSID? a. Masks the network from casual discovery b. Prevents all devices from connecting c. Encrypts the wireless signal d. Guarantees stronger performance Correct Answer: a. Masks the network from casual discovery Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.10 Given a scenario, apply security settings on SOHO wireless and wired networks Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Configuring SSIDs and SSID broadcasting Explanation: Hiding the SSID prevents it from appearing in the list of available networks, adding a layer of obscurity but not encryption.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-060 Question: A technician suspects unauthorized wireless access to a small business network.

Which Windows feature should they check to ensure the network is not discoverable? a. IP address b. Network location setting c. MAC address d. Subnet mask Correct Answer: b. Network location setting Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.10 Given a scenario, apply security settings on SOHO wireless and wired networks Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Windows network options Explanation: Choosing the correct network location setting (e.g., Public) can help ensure the device is not discoverable by other devices on the network.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-061 Question: A user reports suspicious traffic on their home Wi-Fi. Which of the following is the best first step? a. Increase the DHCP lease time. b. Disable IPv6. c. Check the wireless router client list. d. Install a loopback plug.

Correct Answer: c. Check the wireless router client list.

Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common personal computer (PC) security issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless network design Explanation: The client list on a router shows which devices are currently connected, helping identify unauthorized users.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-13-062 Question: A user cannot access a private network resource and suspects a misconfigured IP address. Which Windows tool can confirm the current IP configuration? a. chkdsk b. ipconfig c. tracert d. net use Correct Answer: b. ipconfig Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: IPv6 link-local address and IPv4 address Explanation: ipconfig is the primary command-line tool for displaying current TCP/IP network configuration information.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-063 Question: What tool would a technician use to manually change advanced settings stored in the Windows registry? a. Control Panel b. Task Manager c. File Explorer d. regedit.exe Correct Answer: d. regedit.exe Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Editing the Windows Registry Explanation: The regedit.exe utility allows technicians to view and edit the Windows registry, which contains system and application settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-064 Question: Which of the following describes a key limitation of using 32-bit versions of Windows? a. They cannot connect to wireless networks. b. They cannot use graphical user interfaces. c. They cannot access more than 4 GB of RAM. d. They do not support file encryption.

Correct Answer: c. They cannot access more than 4 GB of RAM. Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.1 Explain common operating system (OS) types and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: 32-Bit vs. 64-Bit Operating Systems Explanation: 32-bit operating systems have a memory addressing limit that prevents them from using more than 4 GB of RAM. Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-065 Question: Which section in Windows 11 Settings allows users to manage options like Display, Sound, and Storage? a. Network & Internet b. System c. Accessibility d. Apps Correct Answer: b. System

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Introduction to Windows Settings Explanation: The System section of the Windows Settings app includes configuration categories such as Display, Sound, Power, Storage, and more.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-066 Question: Which feature allows a user to restore an operating system's previous configuration without affecting personal files? a. Factory reset b. System Restore c. BitLocker d. Disk Cleanup Correct Answer: b. System Restore Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.4 Given a scenario, use Microsoft Windows operating system features and tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Recovering the Windows OS Explanation: System Restore reverts the system configuration to an earlier point without altering user data, unlike full recovery tools.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-14-067 Question: A user wants to change how file extensions are displayed in File Explorer. Where should they go? a. Settings > Apps b. File Explorer > View > Show > File name extensions c. Control Panel > Programs and Features d. Settings > Accessibility > File Options Correct Answer: b. File Explorer > View > Show > File name extensions Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.6 Given a scenario, configure Microsoft Windows settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: File Explorer View Options Explanation: File extensions can be shown by enabling the “File name extensions” checkbox under the View menu in File Explorer.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-068 Question: What does the cd.. command do at the command prompt? a. Moves to the root directory b. Changes the disk c. Exits the command prompt

d. Moves up one directory level Correct Answer: d. Moves up one directory level Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: The cd Command Explanation: The cd.. command moves up one directory level by referencing the parent directory.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-069 Question: What is a key benefit of using scripting in IT operations? a. Requires less training b. Allows graphical user interfaces c. Automates repetitive tasks d. Prevents operating system crashes Correct Answer: c. Automates repetitive tasks Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.8 Explain the basics of scripting Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Scripting Overview Explanation: Scripts automate tasks to increase consistency and reduce manual effort and human error.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-070 Question: Which scripting language is designed specifically for managing Windows environments? a. PowerShell b. Python c. JavaScript d. VBScript Correct Answer: a. PowerShell Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.8 Explain the basics of scripting Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: PowerShell Explanation: PowerShell is a powerful scripting language developed by Microsoft for automating Windows administrative tasks.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-071 Question: Which symbol is used in a command to display output one page at a time? a. / b. | c. > d. * Correct Answer: b. |

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: TECH TIP: Make a command output one page at a time Explanation: The pipe symbol (|) is used with the more command to display long output one page at a time.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-15-072 Question: What is the proper syntax to copy a file from C:\ to E:\ using the command prompt? a. copy C:\ E:\ b. copy C:\file.txt E:\ c. move C:\file.txt E:\ d. cp C:\file.txt E:\ Correct Answer: b. copy C:\file.txt E:\ Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.5 Given a scenario, use the appropriate Microsoft command-line tools Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Copying Files Explanation: The correct syntax for copying a file includes the copy command, the full path of the source file, and the destination.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-073 Question: Which partition style allows partitions larger than 2 TB and is required for UEFI BIOS? a. MBR b. GPT c. Dynamic d. Extended Correct Answer: b. GPT Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Types of Partitions Explanation: The GPT (GUID Partition Table) supports large partitions and is required by UEFIbased systems.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-074 Question: What is the purpose of the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (ADK)? a. To manage user accounts in Active Directory b. To deploy Linux-based operating systems

c. To customize and deploy Windows images at scale d. To remove malware from corporate systems Correct Answer: c. To customize and deploy Windows images at scale Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.2 Perform OS installations and upgrades in a diverse environment Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Corporate Windows Deployment Explanation: The ADK provides tools for creating and deploying customized Windows installations across enterprise environments.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-075 Question: What Windows utility can be used to back up specific user libraries and schedule backups? a. System Restore b. File History c. Disk Management d. Task Scheduler Correct Answer: b. File History Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.3 Implement workstation backup and recovery methods Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Backing Up the Windows Registry and Data Explanation: File History is a backup utility that focuses on user libraries and allows scheduled backups to external drives.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-16-076 Question: Which issue would most likely cause the error "No boot device available" after installing Windows? a. Missing antivirus software b. Wrong boot order in BIOS c. Incorrect driver for sound card d. Expired Windows license Correct Answer: b. Wrong boot order in BIOS Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Software Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 3.1 Troubleshoot common Windows OS issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting a Windows Installation

Explanation: This error is commonly caused when BIOS/UEFI is not set to boot from the drive that contains the operating system.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-077 Question: Which Linux command is used to view all active processes and organize them in a tree format? a. top b. ps aux c. ls -l d. ps faux Correct Answer: d. ps faux Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Viewing Processes Explanation: The ps faux command shows all running processes in a hierarchical tree format.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-078 Question: Which built-in Ubuntu application allows users to perform encrypted backups and supports remote destinations? a. App Center b. rsync c. Time Machine d. Backups Correct Answer: d. Backups Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Basic System Usage, Updates, and Backups Explanation: The Ubuntu Backups app supports encrypted, local, and remote backups and runs in the background.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-079 Question: Which macOS folder contains user-specific preferences, caches, and applicationrelated files? a. /Library b. /System c. /Applications d. /Users/username/Library

Correct Answer: d. /Users/username/Library Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: macOS System Folders Explanation: The /Users/username/Library directory contains personal settings and app-related files for that user.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-080 Question: Which Linux component is responsible for managing the boot process and is known as PID1? a. grub b. init c. systemd d. bootmgr Correct Answer: c. systemd Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.9 Identify common features and tools of the Linux client/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: OS Components and Common Configuration Files Explanation: systemd is the first process started by the kernel and manages services and the boot process.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-17-081 Question: What should a user do if their macOS Dock has disappeared from view? a. Hover the pointer near the screen edge. b. Launch Terminal. c. Reboot the system. d. Reinstall macOS. Correct Answer: a. Hover the pointer near the screen edge.

Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Operating Systems Exam Subobjective: 1.8 Explain common features and tools of the macOS/desktop operating system Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Navigating the User Interface Explanation: Many users set the Dock to auto-hide; hovering near the edge reveals it.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-082 Question: What is the goal of the Zero Trust security model? a. Prevent USB device use. b. Block untrusted websites.

c. Treat all users and devices as untrusted by default. d. Limit access to legacy systems only.

Correct Answer: c. Treat all users and devices as untrusted by default.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Logical Security Explanation: The Zero Trust model assumes no implicit trust and verifies all users, devices, and network activity before granting access.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-083 Question: Which term refers to software that disguises itself as a legitimate program to gain unauthorized access? a. Adware b. Trojan c. Botnet d. Cryptojacker Correct Answer: b. Trojan Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.4 Summarize types of malware and tools/methods for detection, removal, and prevention Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Malware Explanation: A Trojan masquerades as a legitimate application but contains malicious code that compromises the system.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-084 Question: Which type of authentication relies on two or more factors, such as a password and a fingerprint? a. Single sign-on b. Multifactor authentication c. One-time password d. Smart card authentication Correct Answer: b. Multifactor authentication Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Authentication Explanation: Multifactor authentication uses two or more types of credentials—what you know, what you have, or what you are—for enhanced security.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-085 Question: What is the purpose of port security on a corporate switch? a. Disable unused user accounts. b. Limit USB device access. c. Restrict access to only approved MAC addresses. d. Authenticate users to cloud services.

Correct Answer: c. Restrict access to only approved MAC addresses.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Given a scenario, apply workstation security options and hardening techniques Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Logical Security Explanation: Port security allows only devices with specific MAC addresses to connect, preventing unauthorized access to the network.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-18-086 Question: Which password policy guideline helps prevent brute-force attacks? a. Set password expiration intervals. b. Use dictionary words for easier recall. c. Avoid storing passwords in documents. d. Use simple keyboard sequences.

Correct Answer: a. Set password expiration intervals.

Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Security Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Given a scenario, configure and apply basic Microsoft Windows OS security settings Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Login OS Security Options Explanation: Requiring users to update passwords periodically helps reduce the window of vulnerability to brute-force attacks.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-087 Question: Which component in a surge protector absorbs excess voltage during a power spike? a. Resistor b. Capacitor c. MOV (metal oxide varistor) d. TVS diode Correct Answer: c. MOV (metal oxide varistor) Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.4 Use common safety procedures Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Surge Protectors

Explanation: MOVs are used to absorb voltage spikes and protect connected electronic equipment.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-088 Question: Which AI-related concern describes fabricated or inaccurate outputs that seem plausible? a. Bias b. Plagiarism c. AI hallucination d. Overfitting Correct Answer: c. AI hallucination Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.10 Artificial intelligence (AI) Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Artificial Intelligence (AI) Explanation: AI hallucinations occur when an AI system generates responses that are plausible but factually incorrect or fabricated.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-089 Question: What should a technician do first when arriving to service a user’s workstation? a. Immediately begin troubleshooting. b. Ask to speak to the person responsible for the device. c. Inspect the area for food and drink. d. Request network credentials.

Correct Answer: b. Ask to speak to the person responsible for the device.

Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.7 Communication techniques and professionalism Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Customer Service Explanation: Technicians should begin with professional introductions and confirm who owns or uses the device before starting work.

Question ID: A+-220-1202-KF-2-19-090 Question: Which documentation type is used to log and resolve technical issues in a support environment? a. SLA b. Change log c. Incident documentation d. Asset tag registry Correct Answer: c. Incident documentation Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Operational Procedures Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Documentation and support systems Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures

Remediation Heading: Incident Documentation Explanation: Incident documentation is used in help desks and support environments to log and track issues, updates, and resolutions.

202-1201 Test Bank 2 Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-001 Question: Which of the following components are installed into a motherboard expansion slot to add new functionality, such as enhanced graphics or sound? a. Power supply b. Optical drive c. Adapter card d. RAM module Correct Answer: c. Adapter card Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Adapters Explanation: Adapter cards, also known as expansion cards, are inserted into motherboard slots to provide additional features such as improved graphics, sound, or additional ports.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-002 Question: How can a technician determine if a keyboard is working properly? a. Check for software updates b. Open a support ticket c. Press Caps Lock or Num Lock and check for indicator lights d. Replace the device driver Correct Answer: c. Press Caps Lock or Num Lock and check for indicator lights Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard/Mouse Troubleshooting Explanation: Most keyboards have LED lights that toggle when Caps Lock or Num Lock is pressed, indicating functionality.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-003 Question: Which of the following storage devices includes a tray that ejects for inserting discs such as DVDs or CDs? a. Hard drive b. Solid-state drive c. Optical drive d. Flash drive

Correct Answer: c. Optical drive Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Basic Computer Hardware Explanation: Optical drives use discs such as CDs, DVDs, or BDs and are equipped with a tray that ejects outward to allow media insertion.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-004 Question: Which of the following is a binary unit equal to 8 bits? a. Nibble b. Byte c. Kilobyte d. Megabyte Correct Answer: b. Byte Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: 1s and 0s Explanation: A byte is made up of 8 bits and is the basic unit of data storage in computing.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-01-005 Question: What type of connector is used for most modern computer keyboards and mice? a. RJ11 b. PS/2 c. RJ45 d. USB Correct Answer: d. USB Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 1: Introduction to the World of IT Remediation Heading: Keyboard and Mouse Explanation: Modern keyboards and mice typically connect via USB ports, offering plug-andplay compatibility.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-006 Question: Which connector uses a screw-on design and is typically used for cable TV? a. BNC b. RJ11 c. F-type d. SC Correct Answer: c. F-type Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and

purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Coaxial Explanation: F-type connectors are screw-on coaxial connectors used for cable TV and satellite connections.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-007 Question: What type of USB hub draws power from an external source? a. Bus-powered b. Self-powered c. Passive d. Inline Correct Answer: b. Self-powered Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: USB Hubs Explanation: Self-powered USB hubs use an external power supply to power connected devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-008 Question: Which port on a sound card is typically lime green? a. Line-in b. Microphone c. Line-out d. S/PDIF Correct Answer: c. Line-out Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Summarize basic cable types and their connectors, features, and purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Audio Ports Explanation: The lime green port is used for audio line-out to speakers or headphones.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-009 Question: Which wireless technology supports up to 328 feet of range and 128-bit security? a. Infrared b. NFC c. Bluetooth d. Wi-Fi Correct Answer: c. Bluetooth Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot network issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity

Remediation Heading: Wireless Connectivity for Input Devices Explanation: Bluetooth can support up to 328 feet (Class 1) and offers 128-bit security.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-02-010 Question: What is the purpose of using titles like 'Mr.' or 'Dr.' when addressing end users? a. To follow legal naming conventions b. To ensure effective troubleshooting c. To meet soft skill expectations in the workplace d. To avoid support escalation Correct Answer: c. To meet soft skill expectations in the workplace Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot network issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 2: Connectivity Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Using Appropriate Titles Explanation: Using professional titles aligns with workplace soft skill expectations and professional communication standards.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-011 Question: Which cache type is built directly into the processor and offers the fastest access? a. L2 cache b. L3 cache c. SSD cache d. L1 cache Correct Answer: d. L1 cache Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Cache Explanation: L1 cache is integrated into the CPU and is the fastest form of cache memory used for quick access to frequently needed data.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-012 Question: A customer is upgrading their gaming PC. Which processor family offers the most CPU cores for high-end gaming and multitasking? a. Intel Core 3 b. AMD Ryzen 3 c. Intel Core 9 d. AMD Ryzen 5 Correct Answer: c. Intel Core 9 Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard

Remediation Heading: Intel Processors Explanation: Intel Core 9 processors have high core counts and are designed for advanced tasks like gaming and content creation.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-013 Question: What should a technician do before installing a heat sink and fan onto a processor? a. Format the hard drive b. Apply thermal paste to the processor c. Change the BIOS settings d. Connect the CPU to the network Correct Answer: b. Apply thermal paste to the processor Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Installing CPU Thermal Solutions Explanation: Thermal paste or a thermal pad must be applied to improve heat transfer between the processor and heat sink.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-03-014 Question: Which motherboard component helps secure data by storing passwords and encryption keys? a. RAM b. TPM c. PCIe slot d. GPU Correct Answer: b. TPM Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 3: On the Motherboard Remediation Heading: Motherboard Security Options Explanation: The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) provides hardware-level security functions such as encryption and secure boot validation.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-015 Question: A user reports that USB devices randomly stop working. Which BIOS/UEFI setting might resolve this issue? a. Enable TPM b. Change power state from D3 to D0 c. Disable Secure Boot d. Reset the BIOS to defaults Correct Answer: b. Change power state from D3 to D0 Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting USB Explanation: USB power states are managed through BIOS/UEFI and Device Manager. D3 is a low-power state, and switching to D0 (fully on) can help resolve device connectivity issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-016 Question: Which of the following components enables hardware encryption and is often used with Secure Boot and BitLocker? a. BIOS b. CMOS c. TPM d. ESCD Correct Answer: c. TPM Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: TPM Considerations Explanation: The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) stores cryptographic keys and is essential for Secure Boot, BitLocker, and other hardware-based security measures.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-017 Question: Where in Windows can you view IRQ and memory address assignments for installed devices? a. System Configuration b. Task Manager c. Device Manager d. BIOS Setup Correct Answer: c. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Using Device Manager to See Resources Explanation: Device Manager provides views such as “Resources by Type,” which shows IRQ, I/O address, DMA channel, and memory address assignments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-018 Question: What should a technician do first when troubleshooting a newly installed NIC that isn't recognized by the system? a. Replace the motherboard b. Install a wireless adapter c. Verify the card is fully seated and check BIOS/UEFI d. Flash the BIOS Correct Answer: c. Verify the card is fully seated and check BIOS/UEFI Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Installing a Network Interface Card Explanation: Improperly seated network cards and disabled onboard ports in BIOS/UEFI are common causes of network card issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-04-019 Question: A technician installs a new USB bracket and connects it to the motherboard header, but the ports don't function. What is the most likely solution? a. Replace the bracket b. Disable USB permissions c. Enable the USB header in BIOS/UEFI d. Uninstall and reinstall Windows Correct Answer: c. Enable the USB header in BIOS/UEFI Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 4: Introduction to Configuration Remediation Heading: Troubleshooting USB Explanation: If USB headers on the motherboard are disabled in BIOS/UEFI, USB brackets connected to those headers will not work until they are enabled.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-020 Question: What type of connector supplies power to SATA drives? a. 4-pin Molex b. 15-pin SATA power c. 6-pin PCIe d. 24-pin ATX Correct Answer: b. 15-pin SATA power Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Connectors Explanation: SATA drives use a distinctive 15-pin power connector, which supports both 3.3V, 5V, and 12V lines.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-021 Question: Which connector is typically used to power the motherboard? a. 4-pin Molex b. 15-pin SATA c. 24-pin ATX d. 6-pin PCIe Correct Answer: c. 24-pin ATX Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Connectors

Explanation: The 24-pin ATX connector is the primary motherboard power connector in modern systems.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-022 Question: What should be checked first when a computer does not power on at all? a. Operating system files b. Motherboard capacitors c. Power supply switch and cable d. Peripheral connections Correct Answer: c. Power supply switch and cable Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Problems Explanation: Basic external checks, such as cable connections and the power switch, should be your first troubleshooting step.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-023 Question: What symptom most likely indicates a power supply problem? a. A failed operating system update b. Continuous beeping from the BIOS c. Random shutdowns and restarts d. A corrupted hard drive Correct Answer: c. Random shutdowns and restarts Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Power Supply Problems Explanation: A failing or underpowered power supply may cause the system to power cycle randomly or fail to start properly.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-05-024 Question: Why should you take a photo of the inside of a system before disassembly? a. It prevents static electricity buildup b. It makes the process faster c. It ensures correct reassembly d. It identifies software issues Correct Answer: c. It ensures correct reassembly Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 5: Disassembly and Power Remediation Heading: Before You Take It Apart

Explanation: Taking a photo before disassembly helps you remember component placement and cabling when reassembling the system.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-025 Question: In which type of system would ECC memory most likely be used? a. Gaming PC b. Tablet c. Server d. Chromebook Correct Answer: c. Server Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: ECC (Error Correction Code) RAM is typically used in servers to ensure data integrity by detecting and correcting memory errors.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-026 Question: Which of the following memory module characteristics is defined by having a second set of DRAM chips that can be accessed individually? a. Dual-channel b. Registered c. Dual-rank d. ECC Correct Answer: c. Dual-rank Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: Dual-rank memory modules have two sets of DRAM chips, which the system can access one at a time. This differs from dual-channel configurations, which rely on using matched pairs in specific motherboard channels to increase performance.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-027 Question: What does Serial Presence Detect (SPD) provide to the system BIOS/UEFI? a. Application compatibility settings b. Memory error logs c. RAM specifications such as speed and voltage d. Paging file location Correct Answer: c. RAM specifications such as speed and voltage Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory

Remediation Heading: Planning the Memory Installation: Memory Features Explanation: SPD is a chip on the memory module that provides data like capacity, voltage, and timing, which the BIOS uses for configuration.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-06-028 Question: A user wants to install RAM in dual-channel mode but has one 8 GB and one 4 GB module. What is the result? a. Dual-channeling will be enabled in full b. RAM will operate at the higher module's capacity c. Dual-channeling will operate, but only up to the lowest common capacity d. The system will reject the configuration Correct Answer: c. Dual-channeling will operate, but only up to the lowest common capacity Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.3 Compare and contrast RAM characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 6: Memory Remediation Heading: Planning for Memory: Channel Configurations Explanation: Unequal memory sizes can still function in dual-channel mode, but the total dualchannel capacity will be limited by the smaller module.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-029 Question: What happens during the high-level formatting process of a drive? a. Sectors are magnetically encoded b. Operating system is installed c. File system is established and sectors are organized d. Drive is partitioned Correct Answer: c. File system is established and sectors are organized Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: High-Level Formatting Explanation: High-level formatting sets up a file system (like NTFS or exFAT) and prepares the drive to store data.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-030 Question: Which file system is most suitable for large removable drives that need to store files larger than 4 GB? a. FAT16 b. FAT32 c. NTFS d. exFAT Correct Answer: d. exFAT Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Partitioning

Explanation: exFAT is designed for flash drives and supports larger files than FAT32, making it ideal for removable storage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-031 Question: What does a “Not Initialized” status in Disk Management indicate about a drive? a. It is ready for formatting b. The drive contains corrupt sectors c. The drive has not been partitioned d. The disk must be initialized before use Correct Answer: d. The disk must be initialized before use Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Disk Management Explanation: A “Not Initialized” status means the disk hasn’t been prepared for use and must be initialized before partitioning or formatting.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-032 Question: Which tool helps diagnose and fix file system errors on a disk in Windows? a. sfc /scannow b. defrag c. diskpart d. chkdsk Correct Answer: d. chkdsk Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.2 Given a scenario, troubleshoot drive and RAID issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: Data Loss and Corruption Explanation: The chkdsk command checks the file system and disk surface for errors and repairs them when possible.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-07-033 Question: Which setting in BIOS/UEFI must be enabled to use advanced features such as hot swapping on SATA drives? a. RAID mode b. IDE mode c. Legacy mode d. AHCI mode Correct Answer: d. AHCI mode Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.2 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 7: Storage Devices Remediation Heading: System BIOS/UEFI Configuration for Storage Devices

Explanation: AHCI mode must be enabled in BIOS/UEFI to support features such as hot swapping and native command queuing for SATA devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-034 Question: Which of the following is a common symptom of a bad projector bulb? a. Display shows the BIOS screen only b. Projector displays a dim or no image c. Multiple monitors stop responding d. Sound does not work through HDMI Correct Answer: b. Projector displays a dim or no image Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.3 Given a scenario, troubleshoot video, projector, and display issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Projector Troubleshooting Explanation: A dim or absent image is often a sign of a failing or burnt-out projector lamp.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-035 Question: Which Windows utility can be used to verify the status of a newly installed sound card? a. Disk Management b. Device Manager c. System Information d. Task Manager Correct Answer: b. Device Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Cards Using Windows Explanation: Device Manager provides information on whether a sound card is properly recognized and functioning in Windows.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-036 Question: What does the lime green audio port typically support on a sound card? a. Microphone b. Line in c. Line out/front speakers d. Subwoofer Correct Answer: c. Line out/front speakers Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Sound Port Colors Explanation: The lime green audio port is standard for connecting front channel speakers or headphones (line out).

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-037 Question: A technician needs to troubleshoot a touch screen with random swiping issues. What should they check first? a. Sound settings b. Video adapter power c. Digitizer cable connection d. PCIe slot voltage Correct Answer: c. Digitizer cable connection Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Digitizer or Touch Screen Replacement Explanation: A loose or disconnected digitizer cable can cause unresponsive or erratic touch screen behavior.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-08-038 Question: During the installation of a PCIe video card, the technician notices the card requires more power than the motherboard slot can provide. What should the technician do next? a. Connect a SATA cable from the motherboard b. Connect a 6- or 8-pin PCIe power connector from the power supply c. Disable the onboard video in Windows Device Manager d. Use a USB-to-HDMI adapter instead Correct Answer: b. Connect a 6- or 8-pin PCIe power connector from the power supply Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 8: Video and Multimedia Devices Remediation Heading: Video Cards Explanation: Some PCIe video cards require additional power beyond what the PCIe slot provides. These cards must be connected to a 6- or 8-pin PCIe power connector from the power supply to function properly.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-039 Question: What type of printer uses electrostatic charges to transfer toner to the drum? a. Thermal printer b. Laser printer c. Inkjet printer d. Impact printer Correct Answer: b. Laser printer Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, deploy and configure multifunction devices/printers and settings.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Laser Printers

Explanation: Laser printers use a photoconductive drum and electrostatic charges to attract and transfer toner to paper.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-040 Question: Which of the following is a secure way to protect print jobs in a corporate environment? a. Paper tray locking b. Secure Print with PIN entry c. Shared access via USB hub d. Grayscale printing only Correct Answer: b. Secure Print with PIN entry Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.7 Given a scenario, deploy and configure multifunction devices/printers and settings.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Printing/Scanning Data Privacy Explanation: Secure Print requires a PIN for release, ensuring that sensitive printouts are not left unattended.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-041 Question: Which printer issue is most likely caused by a worn pickup roller? a. Faded text b. Paper jam c. Line down page d. No print output Correct Answer: b. Paper jam Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: General Printer Troubleshooting Explanation: Worn pickup rollers can fail to grab paper properly, often causing misfeeds or paper jams.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-042 Question: Which maintenance task should be performed on an impact printer showing horizontal white lines? a. Clean the rollers b. Replace the printhead c. Calibrate the printer d. Refill the ribbon Correct Answer: b. Replace the printhead Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.8 Given a scenario, perform appropriate printer maintenance.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Impact Printer Maintenance

Explanation: White horizontal lines typically indicate that some pins in the printhead are not firing and require replacement.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-09-043 Question: Which of the following is an ethical practice when servicing a printer in a user’s office? a. Read leftover printouts to confirm functionality b. Keep all print history for troubleshooting c. Politely ask the user to remove private documents d. Access all printer logs without informing the user Correct Answer: c. Politely ask the user to remove private documents Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 9: Printers/Multifunction Devices Remediation Heading: Soft Skills: Work Ethics Explanation: It is professional and ethical to respect the user's privacy and ask them to remove personal or sensitive documents.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-044 Question: Which configuration is necessary for tethering a mobile device to share its internet connection? a. Airplane mode enabled b. Bluetooth pairing c. Firewall disabled d. Secure boot enabled Correct Answer: b. Bluetooth pairing Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Tethering Explanation: Tethering often uses Bluetooth or USB to share a mobile device's cellular internet connection.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-045 Question: Which mobile technology provides the fastest wireless data speeds over cellular networks? a. 3G b. 4G LTE c. 5G d. WiMAX Correct Answer: c. 5G Exam Domain/Objective: 1.0 Mobile Devices Exam Subobjective: 1.3 Given a scenario, configure basic mobile device network connectivity and provide application support.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices

Remediation Heading: Mobile Network Technologies Explanation: 5G offers significantly higher data speeds and lower latency than earlier generations of cellular networks.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-046 Question: What is the purpose of screen calibration on a mobile device? a. Improve screen resolution b. Fix touchscreen responsiveness c. Update display drivers d. Change brightness settings Correct Answer: b. Fix touchscreen responsiveness Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Touchscreen Troubleshooting Explanation: Calibrating the screen ensures the touchscreen accurately registers user input.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-10-047 Question: A technician performs a factory reset on a smartphone. What is the result? a. All system apps are updated b. All user data is retained c. The device is restored to its original state d. The operating system is upgraded Correct Answer: c. The device is restored to its original state Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 10: Mobile Devices Remediation Heading: Factory Reset Explanation: A factory reset restores the device to its default settings, removing all user data and apps.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-048 Question: Which POST beep code on an AMI BIOS typically indicates a RAM problem? a. 6 short beeps b. 8 short beeps c. 1 short beep d. 1 long, 2 short beeps Correct Answer: c. 1 short beep Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: POST Codes and Error Messages Explanation: On AMI BIOS, 1 or 2 short beeps usually indicate RAM-related errors.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-049 Question: A user upgraded their SSD, and now the system fails to detect the drive. Which step

should the technician take first? a. Replace the SSD b. Change the boot order in UEFI c. Install an additional GPU d. Remove all other storage drives Correct Answer: b. Change the boot order in UEFI Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: The Boot Process Explanation: If the system doesn’t detect the new SSD, one of the first things to check is the boot order in UEFI, especially after hardware changes.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-050 Question: A user complains that their workstation frequently shuts down and restarts randomly.

Which component should the technician check first? a. Optical drive b. Display cable c. RAM seating and power supply output d. Audio subsystem Correct Answer: c. RAM seating and power supply output Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Random Device Failure Explanation: Intermittent shutdowns often stem from loose RAM modules or insufficient power output from the power supply.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-11-051 Question: Which computer subsystem should be upgraded first to improve video rendering and 3D performance in a CAD workstation? a. RAM b. SSD c. Sound card d. Video card with GPU Correct Answer: d. Video card with GPU Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 11: Computer Design and Troubleshooting Review Remediation Heading: Graphic/CAD/CAM Design Workstations Explanation: A high-end video card with a powerful GPU is critical for performance in CAD/CAM and rendering tasks.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-052 Question: What should a technician check first if a VoIP user reports poor call quality and audio dropouts? a. Whether the PC has enough RAM b. If Quality of Service (QoS) is implemented correctly c. Whether the VoIP phone is running antivirus software d. If the ISP supports HTTPS traffic Correct Answer: b. If Quality of Service (QoS) is implemented correctly Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.5 Given a scenario, troubleshoot network issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: VoIP Explanation: QoS prioritizes important traffic like VoIP. If it is not implemented or misconfigured, call quality can degrade due to jitter or latency.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-053 Question: Which cloud deployment model allows multiple unrelated organizations to share infrastructure and development costs? a. Private cloud b. Hybrid cloud c. Community cloud d. Public cloud Correct Answer: c. Community cloud Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Summarize cloud computing concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Cloud Service Deployment Methods Explanation: A community cloud is shared among multiple organizations with common interests or goals, allowing them to share costs and IT infrastructure.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-054 Question: Which type of hypervisor runs directly on the host's hardware, providing better performance and efficiency? a. Type 2 hypervisor b. Emulator c. Container engine d. Type 1 hypervisor Correct Answer: d. Type 1 hypervisor Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies

Remediation Heading: Desktop Virtualization Basics Explanation: A Type 1 hypervisor runs directly on the host’s hardware, unlike a Type 2 hypervisor which runs within an operating system. This gives Type 1 hypervisors better performance and lower overhead.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-055 Question: Which statement is true about virtual machines (VMs) and security? a. VMs are immune to malware by default b. Only the host OS needs to be patched c. VM escape can compromise both host and other VMs d. A hypervisor cannot be attacked directly Correct Answer: c. VM escape can compromise both host and other VMs Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Virtualization Security Explanation: VM escape is a serious security risk where an attacker breaches the VM environment and gains access to other VMs and the host system.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-12-056 Question: Which cloud computing feature allows a business to quickly scale up resources during peak demand and scale down afterward? a. File synchronization b. Multitenancy c. Elasticity d. Metered utilization Correct Answer: c. Elasticity Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.2 Summarize cloud computing concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 12: Internet Connectivity, Virtualization, and Cloud Technologies Remediation Heading: Cloud Characteristics/Advantages Explanation: Elasticity allows cloud services to dynamically adjust resource allocation based on real-time demand, supporting efficient scaling.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-057 Question: Which of the following is a characteristic of a mesh network? a. All devices connect through a central access point b. Each device is connected only to a switch c. Devices connect directly to each other d. Devices use coaxial cable exclusively Correct Answer: c. Devices connect directly to each other Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.7 Compare and contrast internet connection types, network types, and

their characteristics Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Network Topologies Explanation: In a mesh network, devices connect directly to one another for increased redundancy and reliability.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-058 Question: What wireless frequency band is more susceptible to interference from microwave ovens and cordless phones? a. 1.2 GHz b. 2.4 GHz c. 5 GHz d. 900 MHz Correct Answer: b. 2.4 GHz Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless Standards and Interference Explanation: The 2.4 GHz band is commonly affected by interference from household devices.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-059 Question: Which tool would a technician use to identify a specific cable in a bundle by sending a signal through it? a. Crimper b. Cable tester c. Tone generator and probe d. Multimeter Correct Answer: c. Tone generator and probe Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Explain networking tools and their purposes Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Networking Tools Explanation: A tone generator and probe allow technicians to trace and identify cables in large bundles.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-060 Question: What is the purpose of Power over Ethernet (PoE)? a. To boost weak network signals b. To connect multiple devices wirelessly c. To send data over fiber optics d. To deliver power and data over the same Ethernet cable Correct Answer: d. To deliver power and data over the same Ethernet cable Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.5 Compare and contrast common networking hardware devices Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wired Connectivity

Explanation: PoE enables both data and electrical power to be transmitted over Ethernet cabling, useful for devices like IP cameras and access points.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-13-061 Question: Which wireless security protocol offers the strongest encryption for modern networks? a. WEP b. WPA c. WPA2 d. WPA3 Correct Answer: d. WPA3 Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 13: Networking Remediation Heading: Wireless Security Explanation: WPA3 provides the most robust encryption and security features available for WiFi networks.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-062 Question: Which of the following settings would you access to determine the amount of RAM and Windows version installed? a. Control Panel > Device Manager b. File Explorer > System Tools c. Settings > System > About d. File Explorer > This PC > Network Correct Answer: c. Settings > System > About Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Determining the Windows Version Explanation: The About section in Settings displays system details including RAM, processor, and OS version.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-063 Question: Which Windows file system feature allows file-level encryption on a single folder or file basis? a. BitLocker b. System Restore c. EFS d. File History Correct Answer: c. EFS Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems

Remediation Heading: Encrypting File System (EFS) Explanation: EFS (Encrypting File System) allows individual files or folders to be encrypted for added security.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-064 Question: What tool allows technicians to view and modify Windows registry entries? a. System Restore b. msconfig c. Task Manager d. regedit.exe Correct Answer: d. regedit.exe Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Editing the Windows Registry Explanation: The regedit.exe utility is used to view and edit registry entries in Windows.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-14-065 Question: What is a key reason businesses prefer domains over workgroups for managing user access? a. Workgroups allow better peer-to-peer gaming b. Domains provide centralized authentication and management c. Domains cost less to implement d. Workgroups offer enhanced encryption features Correct Answer: b. Domains provide centralized authentication and management Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 14: Introduction to Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Corporate Operating System Needs Explanation: Domains allow centralized control via Active Directory, making management and security easier.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-066 Question: Which command-line utility is used to format a drive with a specific file system? a. ipconfig b. format c. netstat d. sfc Correct Answer: b. format Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Using Command-Line Tools for Storage

Explanation: The format command prepares a storage device with a file system such as NTFS or FAT32.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-067 Question: Which tool would you use to assign a network drive letter to a shared folder? a. diskpart b. net use c. chkdsk d. format Correct Answer: b. net use Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.4 Explain common network configuration concepts.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Drive Mapping in Networking Explanation: net use maps network drives by assigning drive letters to shared folders.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-068 Question: Which command shows the path packets take to reach a destination IP address? a. nslookup b. tracert c. ping d. ipconfig Correct Answer: b. tracert Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Basic Network Troubleshooting with Command Line Explanation: tracert shows the route taken by packets to reach a specific IP address or domain.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-069 Question: Which of the following utilities can resolve a domain name to an IP address? a. ping b. nslookup c. tracert d. netstat Correct Answer: b. nslookup Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: DNS Troubleshooting with Command Line Explanation: nslookup queries DNS servers to resolve domain names to IP addresses.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-15-070 Question: Which command-line utility can show current TCP/IP connections and listening ports? a. netstat b. ipconfig c. tracert d. ping Correct Answer: a. netstat Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.8 Given a scenario, configure basic wired/wireless small office/home office (SOHO) networks.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 15: Introduction to Scripting Remediation Heading: Analyzing Network Connections Explanation: netstat displays network connections and port activity on the system.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-071 Question: Which of the following tools would you use to create and manage virtual machines in Windows 11 Pro? a. Hyper-V Manager b. System Configuration c. Services d. Task Scheduler Correct Answer: a. Hyper-V Manager Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Using Hyper-V Explanation: Hyper-V Manager enables users to create and manage virtual machines on supported Windows editions like Windows 11 Pro. Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-072 Question: Which feature allows users to run a temporary virtualized Windows environment for testing? a. BitLocker b. Windows Sandbox c. System Restore d. Secure Boot Correct Answer: b. Windows Sandbox Exam Domain/Objective: 4.0 Virtualization and Cloud Computing Exam Subobjective: 4.1 Explain virtualization concepts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Using Sandbox Explanation: Windows Sandbox provides a lightweight, isolated environment to safely test applications or settings.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-073 Question: Which of the following best describes the purpose of Windows Update? a. To install software from the Microsoft Store b. To monitor running services c. To keep Windows secure and up to date d. To schedule system backups Correct Answer: c. To keep Windows secure and up to date Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Windows Update Explanation: Windows Update automatically downloads and installs updates to maintain system stability and security.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-074 Question: What is the purpose of UAC (User Account Control) in Windows? a. To prevent unauthorized software installations b. To manage device drivers c. To back up system files d. To create new user accounts Correct Answer: a. To prevent unauthorized software installations Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: User Account Control Explanation: UAC helps prevent unauthorized changes to the operating system by prompting for confirmation or administrator credentials.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-16-075 Question: Which setting in Task Manager allows you to view background processes and resource usage? a. Services tab b. Users tab c. Performance tab d. Processes tab Correct Answer: d. Processes tab Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards Remediation Chapter: Chapter 16: Advanced Windows Remediation Heading: Task Manager Explanation: The Processes tab in Task Manager displays all running apps and background processes, including CPU, memory, and disk usage.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-076 Question: In macOS, which utility allows users to perform secure erase operations and manage partitions? a. Activity Monitor b. Disk Utility c. Time Machine d. Terminal Correct Answer: b. Disk Utility Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.4 Compare and contrast storage devices.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Disk Utility Explanation: Disk Utility provides disk formatting, partitioning, and secure erase options in macOS.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-077 Question: Which macOS feature creates full and incremental backups automatically on an external drive? a. Keychain Access b. App Store c. Console d. Time Machine Correct Answer: d. Time Machine Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Time Machine Explanation: Time Machine is macOS's built-in backup solution that supports full and incremental backups.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-078 Question: Which command in macOS or Linux is used to change the ownership of a file? a. chmod b. grep c. chown d. su Correct Answer: c. chown Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Terminal

Explanation: The chown command changes file ownership and requires superuser privileges in most cases.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-079 Question: Which macOS troubleshooting mode starts the computer with minimal system processes and checks the disk? a. Safe Mode b. Recovery Mode c. Verbose Mode d. Target Disk Mode Correct Answer: a. Safe Mode Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Safe Mode Explanation: Safe Mode starts macOS with limited processes and performs a disk check to help resolve issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-17-080 Question: Which utility should a technician use in macOS to view application and system log files? a. Disk Utility b. Force Quit c. Console d. System Information Correct Answer: c. Console Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 17: macOS and Linux Operating Systems Remediation Heading: Console Explanation: Console is used to view logs from macOS and installed applications, helping identify the cause of issues.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-081 Question: Which authentication method combines something you know with something you have? a. Password only b. Biometric scan only c. Multifactor authentication d. Security questions Correct Answer: c. Multifactor authentication Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting

Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Using Authentication and Authorization Explanation: Multifactor authentication increases security by requiring credentials from two or more categories, like a password (something you know) and a smartphone (something you have).

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-082 Question: Which of the following would best help defend against phishing attacks? a. Full disk encryption b. Employee training c. Network load balancing d. Physical locks on devices Correct Answer: b. Employee training Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Understanding Social Engineering Explanation: Phishing relies on tricking users; training helps them recognize suspicious emails and avoid clicking malicious links.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-083 Question: Which term describes a targeted social engineering attack that appears to come from a trusted source? a. Spoofing b. Spear phishing c. Spam d. Zero-day attack Correct Answer: b. Spear phishing Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.4 Given a scenario, troubleshoot common mobile device issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Understanding Social Engineering Explanation: Spear phishing targets specific individuals by using personal details to create believable, malicious messages.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-084 Question: Which of the following hardware features must be enabled to support secure boot and drive encryption in modern systems? a. ECC b. TPM c. UAC d. NFC Correct Answer: b. TPM Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.5 Given a scenario, install and configure motherboards, central processing units (CPUs), and add-on cards.

Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Encrypting Data / Securing Devices Explanation: The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a hardware chip used to securely store encryption keys, enabling technologies such as full disk encryption and secure boot. The BIOS/UEFI firmware must have TPM enabled for these features to work.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-18-085 Question: Which wireless security protocol offers the highest level of protection for a home network? a. WEP b. WPA c. WPA2 d. WPA3 Correct Answer: d. WPA3 Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.2 Explain wireless networking technologies Remediation Chapter: Chapter 18: Computer and Network Security Remediation Heading: Securing Wireless Networks Explanation: WPA3 is the most current and secure wireless encryption standard, offering stronger protection than WPA2, WPA, or WEP. Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-086 Question: Which documentation would be most useful for tracking the physical location and technical details of a company’s laptops? a. Network topology diagram b. Asset management system c. Service-level agreement d. Knowledge base Correct Answer: b. Asset management system Exam Domain/Objective: 2.0 Networking Exam Subobjective: 2.3 Summarize services provided by networked hosts Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Asset Management Explanation: Asset management helps maintain hardware records and track device assignments.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-087 Question: What is the purpose of a maintenance window in a change management plan? a. To prevent any new changes b. To test software backups c. To implement planned changes with minimal disruption d. To archive help desk tickets Correct Answer: c. To implement planned changes with minimal disruption Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.1 Given a scenario, troubleshoot motherboards, RAM, CPUs, and power Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Change Management

Explanation: Maintenance windows reduce impact on users by scheduling changes during lowusage times.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-088 Question: What is a potential danger of handling spilled toner without proper equipment? a. Overheating the printer b. Tripping over cables c. Respiratory irritation d. Overcharging the battery Correct Answer: c. Respiratory irritation Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Toner Safety and Disposal Explanation: Toner dust can irritate the respiratory system if inhaled; use PPE when cleaning spills.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-089 Question: A technician receives an angry call from a customer. What is the best first step? a. Interrupt and explain the problem b. Stay silent and wait them out c. Tell them to calm down d. Listen attentively and acknowledge the frustration Correct Answer: d. Listen attentively and acknowledge the frustration Exam Domain/Objective: 5.0 Hardware and Network Troubleshooting Exam Subobjective: 5.6 Given a scenario, troubleshoot printer issues Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Dealing with a Difficult Customer or Situation Explanation: Professionalism requires listening actively and validating the customer’s concerns.

Question ID: A+-220-1201-KF-2-19-090 Question: Which power protection device offers the best protection against both surges and brownouts? a. Line conditioner b. Surge suppressor c. Power strip d. Extension cord Correct Answer: a. Line conditioner Exam Domain/Objective: 3.0 Hardware Exam Subobjective: 3.6 Given a scenario, install the appropriate power supply Remediation Chapter: Chapter 19: Operational Procedures Remediation Heading: Line Conditioners Explanation: Line conditioners provide clean, stable power by correcting overvoltage and undervoltage conditions.